dokumendiregister.ee
OtsingAsutusedMCP
Otsing›Maanteeamet
KorraldusAvalik

Riigihanke „Kiirustabloode, märgutuledega märkide ning hoiatuslampide hooldus 2021-2023“ (viitenumber 224439) riigihanke alusdokumentide muutmine

Maanteeamet · 2. juuli 2020
Viit
1-23/20/541
Registreeritud
2. juuli 2020
Dokumendi liik
Korraldus
Funktsioon
1 Üldjuhtimine
Sari
1-23 Riigihangete üldkäskkirjad ja korraldused
Toimik
1-23/2020
Vastutaja
Kai Randlaine (MA, Õigusosakond, Riigihangete talitus)

Failid

  • 📎1-2320541 02.07.2020 Korraldus.bdoc24868 KB

Sisu (failidest)

Safelight ohutussüsteemi komponentide loetelu Objekt: Viimsi ,Randvere Tee Toode kogus tootja Edasimüüja Termosensor Trafione 195 2 Flir Safelight OÜ Led moodulid, komplekt 1märk,24V 1W 6 Safelight OÜ Safelight OÜ Releed 24 V,10A 2 laiatarbe kaup SLO Toiteblokk 24v 10A 1 Weidmüller SLO Siemens logo!, programmeeritav juhtseade 1 Siemens SLO Sagedusmuundur 1 Safelight OÜ Safelight OÜ Akud 12V 2 enamlevinud päikesepaneelidega SLO sobivad akud UPS Meanwell DR-UPS-40 1 Meanwell SLO 2 Päikesepaneel 24V NAPS solar NAPS solar Päikesepaneeli kontroller 48V 1 NAPS solar OÜ IB FOOR Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi „Ümberpõike suund“ kasutusjuhend Versioon 1.0 November 2018 OÜ IB Foor Telefon +372 656 3916 Artelli 8c Faks +372 656 3807 10621 Tallinn [email protected] OÜ IB FOOR SISUKORD 1. Süsteemi kirjeldus 3 2. Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise funktsiooni sisse lülitamine 3 3. Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise funktsiooni välja lülitamine 4 4. Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise sageduse seadistamine 4 2 OÜ IB FOOR 1. Süsteemi kirjeldus Tegemist on märgutuledega varustatud liiklusmärgiga (LM 421 - ümberpõike suund, edaspidi Liiklusmärk). Liiklusmärgi eesmärk on ohutussaarele läheneva sõidukijuhi tähelepanu juhtimine visuaalsel meetodil. Süsteem koosneb järgmistest komponentidest: • 2.klassi kilega kaetud ja LED märgutuledega varustatud liiklusmärk • aku • päikesepaneel • päikesepaneeli juhtmoodul • post 2. Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise funktsiooni sisse lülitamine Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise funktsiooni aktiveerimiseks avatakse 4 kinnituskruvi märgi esiküljel vt. Joonis 1. Joonis 1 3 OÜ IB FOOR Liiklusmärgi esimene külg avaneb alla poole. Märgutulede aktiveerimiseks liiklusmärgis lülitatakse joonisel 2 esile toodud automaatkaitse lüliti ülemisse asendisse. Joonis 2 3. Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise funktsiooni välja lülitamine Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise funktsiooni väljalülitamiseks keerata lahti 4 kinnituskruvi märgi esiküljel. Märgutulede väljalülitamiseks lülitatakse joonisel 2 esile toodud automaatkaitse lüliti alumisse asendisse (vt. Joonis 2). 4. Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise sageduse seadistamine Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi vilkumise sageduse seadistamiseks ava liiklusmärgi esimene külg. Liiklusmärgis on LED ahela juhtmoodul (vt. Joonis 3) Joonis 3 4 OÜ IB FOOR Liiklusmärgi märgutulede vilkumise sageduse muutmiseks reguleeritakse parempoolset pöördlülitit (vt. Joonis 3). Kokku on lülitil 16 erineva vilkumise sagedusega töörežiimi alates 0,3; 0,4; 0,5 … 1,8 sekundi järel ON/OFF. NB! Vasakpoolne pöördlüliti peab olema vaikimisi seadistatud asendisse 8. 5 SWARCO SWARCO FUTURIT FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrt- richtungsanzeiger ORDER REF.: 10006764 / POSNr. 15 DEVICE TYPE: VMS-L-DM-700-KO-LCD-L3*-B3 FILE NAME: 10006764-15-PD-EN-V1.0 DATE: 04.12.2018 VERSION: Version 1.0 AUTHOR: Manuela Giefing APPROVED: Günter Nussbaumer SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme GmbH Mühlgasse 86 A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf TEL.: +43-1-895 79 24 -0 FAX: +43-1-894 21 48 URL: www.swarcofuturit.com SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Mechanics ................................................................................................................... 6 1.1 Housing ............................................................................................................................................. 6 1.1.1 Mechanical interface................................................................................................................... 6 1.2 Matrix ................................................................................................................................................. 6 1.2.1 Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... 6 1.2.1.1 Limited part ............................................................................................................................. 6 1.3 Electrical characteristics ................................................................................................................. 7 1.4 Controller components .................................................................................................................... 7 1.4.1 LED Chains ................................................................................................................................ 7 1.4.1.1 LED Chains white ................................................................................................................... 7 2 Visual and physical performance according EN 12966 ........................................... 8 2.1 Visual performance, overview......................................................................................................... 8 2.1.1 Limited part ................................................................................................................................. 8 2.2 Physical characteristics .................................................................................................................. 8 3 Quality Policy .............................................................................................................. 9 4 Environmental Policy ............................................................................................... 10 5 Service- and repair assistance guide ...................................................................... 11 5.1 Over voltage protection ................................................................................................................. 11 5.2 Replacement of line safety switch or an faulty current circuit breaker .................................... 11 5.3 Replacement of a DC-DC converter.............................................................................................. 11 5.4 LED chain driver (AV2014 “D”) ..................................................................................................... 12 5.4.1 Replacement of the unit............................................................................................................ 12 5.4.2 Flashing the firmware with the Flash Development Toolkit ...................................................... 12 5.4.3 Configuration of LED-Chain-Driver Master and Slave ............................................................. 18 5.4.4 Transfer the configuration into the LChD ................................................................................. 24 5.5 Replacement of a LED chain ......................................................................................................... 27 5.6 Changing a lightsensor (analogue) .............................................................................................. 27 6 Instructions for storage, installation, commissioning, inspection and operation of Variable Message Traffic Signs (VMS) ...................................................................... 28 6.1 Storage of Units .............................................................................................................................. 28 6.2 Lifting of Units ................................................................................................................................ 28 6.3 Mechanical mounting and adjustment of VMS ............................................................................ 29 6.3.1 Adjustment of VMS ................................................................................................................... 30 6.3.1.1 Vertical inclination................................................................................................................. 30 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 3 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 6.3.1.2 Horizontal adjustment .......................................................................................................... 31 6.4 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................... 33 6.5 Cable glands ................................................................................................................................... 33 6.6 Third party components ................................................................................................................ 34 6.7 Commissioning .............................................................................................................................. 34 6.8 How to display traffic colours on full colour variable message traffic signs .......................... 34 6.9 Inspection ....................................................................................................................................... 35 6.10 Software settings and configuration files ................................................................................... 35 6.11 Cleaning .......................................................................................................................................... 36 ANNEX A: OPE Calculation ............................................................................................ 37 ANNEX 1: Drawing of Matrix .......................................................................................... 39 ANNEX 2: Drawing of Housing ....................................................................................... 39 ANNEX 3: Circuit diagram .............................................................................................. 39 CHANGES OF DOCUMENT ............................................................................................. 40 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 4 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger LIST OF FIGURES Figure 6-1 FDT 3.4-AV2014-1 ........................................................................................................................ 12 Figure 6-2 FDT 3.4-AV2014-2 ........................................................................................................................ 13 Figure 6-3 FDT 3.4-AV2014-3 ........................................................................................................................ 13 Figure 6-4 FDT 3.4-AV2014-4 ........................................................................................................................ 14 Figure 6-5 FDT 3.4-AV2014-5 ........................................................................................................................ 14 Figure 6-6 FDT 3.4-AV2014-6 ........................................................................................................................ 15 Figure 6-7 FDT 3.4-AV2014-7 ........................................................................................................................ 15 Figure 6-8 FDT 3.4-AV2014-8 ........................................................................................................................ 16 Figure 6-9 FDT 3.4-AV2014-9 .......................................................................................................................... 16 Figure 6-10 FDT 3.4-AV2014-10 ...................................................................................................................... 17 Figure 6-11 Hyper Terminal settings ................................................................................................................ 24 LIST OF TABLES Table 6-1 Configuration of a AV2014 ............................................................................................................. 23 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 5 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 1 Mechanics 1.1 Housing Drawing number M7962 Diameter [mm] 700 Depth [mm] 150 Weight [kg] 25 Material AlMg3 Material thickness [mm] 2,5 Surface treatment Powder coating Colour RAL 7042 Service access Matrix door Ventilation system passive diagonal ventilation Drainage holes in the bottom d=5mm with internal splash guard plates Cable inlets (max. dumping range) 2 x M20 (5-14mm) 1.1.1 Mechanical interface Type thread holes M8 (l=16mm) 1.2 Matrix Drawing number 75949310-01 B Matrix diameter [mm] 700 Matrix thickness [mm] 3 Material AlMg3 Surface treatment anodized and black mat lacquered Contrast foil 3 M films series 3930 white + 1175 blue 1.2.1 Symbols 1.2.1.1 Limited part See drawing of Matrix. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 6 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 1.3 Electrical characteristics Drawing number EB000490-0 Power supply [VDC] 24 +/- 10% Frequency [Hz] - Power consumption typically (w/o heater/fan) 1 [W] 4 Power consumption maximum (with heater/fan) 2 [W] 5 Mains terminal [mm²] 0,2 – 4,0 Internal fuse protection: circuit breaker [A] max. 2 Char C Recommended external fuse protection [A] 4 Char C Potential equalisation bolt M10 Internal voltage LED chains [VDC] 48 Internal voltage chain controller [VDC] 48 EMV emission, noise immunity: EN50293 Over voltage protection Class II 1.4 Controller components Controlling interface dry contacts acc. to electro plan Display Controller LED Chain Driver 1.4.1 LED Chains 1.4.1.1 LED Chains white LED Type white NICHIA NSPW510DS Number of LED’s per Chain 13 Number of Chains 5 1 Due to component tolerances values may deviate by +/- 10%. 2 As applicable SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 7 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 2 Visual and physical performance according EN 12966 2.1 Visual performance, overview 2.1.1 Limited part Optics FUTURIT 12x4 Optic Pressed in from the front side Luminance EN 12966 L3(*) Beam width EN 12966 B3 Colour EN 12966 C2 Luminance ratio EN 12966 R3 Uniformity EN 12966 pass Visible flicker EN 12966 pass 2.2 Physical characteristics Temperature range class EN 12966 T2 Protection class EN 12966 P2 (IP54) 3 Horizontal loads: 4 Wind load EN12899 WL9 Dynamic snow load EN12899 DSL0 Bending EN12899 TDB2 Torsion EN12899 TDT0 Environmental tests EN 12966 fulfilled For detailed properties refer to test report: “SGS testreport physical performance_EN_12966” issued by SGS/UK5. 3 Ventilation and drainageholes correlate with IP54 4 The product standard EN 12966 is referring to these standard 5 SGS/UK is Notified Product Certification Body of CEN (Committee of European Normalization) and entitled to approve VMS in accordance with requirements of EN 12966 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 8 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 3 Quality Policy Variable massage signs from SWARCO FUTURIT are designed, produced and tested according to highest quality demands of EN ISO 9001: 2015. Furthermore, variable massage signs are tested according to CE Standard to fulfil highest criteria of the actual release of EN 12966. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 9 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 4 Environmental Policy Variable massage signs from SWARCO FUTURIT are designed, produced and tested according to environ- mental demands of EN ISO 14001: 2015. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 10 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 5 Service- and repair assistance guide This part of the documentation explains service and maintenance of Variable Message Signs. Authorised and qualified stuff only is permitted to carry out Service and Maintenance work! The main power of the VMS must be switched off before changing any parts!!! DANGER OF LIFE!!! In case of any fault or failure message the supply voltages have to be checked according to the circuit diagram first. The following chapters will give additionally information to find and replace defective components. Only original spare parts from SWARCO FUTURIT may be used! Defective units must be sent back to SWARCO FUTURIT with an error description and the serial number of the VMS and where it was demounted, to accept guarantee or warranty demands. 5.1 Over voltage protection Over voltage protection devices have windows indicating the status of the device. If the window is red this unit is defect and has to be changed. Replace the element by a new one from the same type. Note: When measuring insulation in the system, remove the elements, during the measurement! 5.2 Replacement of line safety switch or an faulty current circuit breaker Each VMS consist of safety switches (LS). Electrical units are protected by these switches. Service plugs or light bulbs are protected by an additional fault current circuit breaker (FI-LS) To change such a unit do as follows: 1. Switch off the power of the VMS! 2. Open the screws of the terminal and remove the wires 3. On their bottom side the units have a locking device. Use a flat screw driver to pull out this device. Now it’s possible to change the unit. To install a new unit, follow the steps in reversed order. Hint: Faulty current circuit breaker switches are equipped with a test button. Use this button to check the functionality of the unit during inspection of the VMS. 5.3 Replacement of a DC-DC converter If no voltage is measured on the secondary side, while the unit is properly connected to the main power, the DC-DC-converter has to be replaced: 1. Switch off the power of the VMS! 2. Remove all wires. 3. The unit is either mounted with 4 screws or mounted on a din rail. Remove the power supply properly. To install a new unit, follow the steps in reversed order. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 11 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 5.4 LED chain driver (AV2014 “D”) 5.4.1 Replacement of the unit Indication LEDs and/or test software will help to find defective units: If the unit is defective replace it as follows: 1. Switch off the power of the VMS! 2. Unplug all Connectors. 3. Now take a flat screwdriver and pull off the mounting ears on the left and on the right side of the LED chain driver. Now remove the unit from the rail. To install a new unit, follow the steps in reversed order. 5.4.2 Flashing the firmware with the Flash Development Toolkit After changing the unit, you have to download the firmware and the configuration file to the unit. If you have never flashed an AV2014 with the FDT 3.4, please install the FDT 3.4 and ALWAYS use the default settings during the installation procedure! Then start the software, select „FILE – new Workspace …“. You should see the following windows: STEP 1: create a new workspace: Figure 5-1 FDT 3.4-AV2014-1 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 12 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger STEP 2: choose the device and the kernel H8S/2398F for LChD revision “D” and H8S/2357F for revision “C” or older Figure 5-2 FDT 3.4-AV2014-2 Figure 5-3 FDT 3.4-AV2014-3 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 13 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger STEP 3: select the communications port Figure 5-4 FDT 3.4-AV2014-4 STEP 4: set the correct CPU frequency (only for H2398F needed) Figure 5-5 FDT 3.4-AV2014-5 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 14 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger STEP 5: take the default values Figure 5-6 FDT 3.4-AV2014-6 STEP 6: select no protection and finish the settings Figure 5-7 FDT 3.4-AV2014-7 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 15 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger STEP 7: select „Simple Interface ...“ Figure 5-8 FDT 3.4-AV2014-8 STEP 8: select „Download File“ and select your binary (*.MOT file) Figure 5-9 FDT 3.4-AV2014-9 STEP 9: connect the AV-2014 via a null modem cable to the computer’s COM port press and hold the TEST button, press the RESET button and loose it again, loose the TEST button (now no LED should be activated on the controller) SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 16 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger STEP 10: select „Program Flash“ to flash the controller Figure 5-10 FDT 3.4-AV2014-10 STEP 11: select „Exit“ – you now have flashed the controller STEP 12: set the rotary switches according the description in the readme.txt STEP 13: press RESET The controller now responds to the address which it was set for. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 17 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 5.4.3 Configuration of LED-Chain-Driver Master and Slave For configuration of the LChD you may use MS-Excel as editor. To communicate with the system, connect a terminal(emulator) set at 9600 baud, 8 data-bits, 1 stop-bit, no parity. If the dip-switch is set to: 00 the system reads configuration from eeprom and starts running. 01-7F TLS id 1-127 at 9600 8/1/E (see separate section on TLS) 80-8F the system reads configuration from eeprom and starts running, controlling by the right dip-switch (0-F) one of the following: current - light control mode 5 flashing time - dip switch mode 1 first timer - dip switch mode 2 A0-EF the system is responding to FuturitCom requests with addr=0-79 at 9600 baud FE burn in program, all chains on 20 mA FF production test program other the system starts running the default configuration - see below Pressing <Enter> shows: RUN> To create new configuration, enter: CONFIG the system displays: CONFIG> when using TLS first define the valid symbols: TLS 23 24 25 23 turns on I/O 201 (202 if flashing) 24 turns on I/O 203 (204 if flashing) etc. .. .. Up to 16 symbols can be entered. when using ChainCom optionally enter alternate broadcast ID: BI 254 sets the broadcast ID to 254 instead of the default 255. now you can enter the flashing ON and OFF-time with one decimal: T 1.0 2.0 sets the flashing time to 1.0 second ON and 2.0 seconds OFF; the OFF time can be followed by up to eight timers. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 18 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger Light control parameters: L 500 5000 1 makes the system adjust the currents linearly between the minimum and maximum current. At lux value 500 you get the minimum current, at 5000 the maximum current. The first parameter (500) defines min-lux, the second (5000) defines max-lux and the last parameter (1) defines the light control mode: 0 light control via DI 5, if the input 5 is used for light control do not fill in L-line 1 linear control 2 logarithmic control 3 ON/OFF control - sign is dimming if lux-value is ≤ min-lux and stops dimming when lux-value > max-lux 4 controlled by ChainCom or in a slave by the ChainBus master; if min- and max-lux are not used - use: L 0 0 4 5 controlled by the right dip-switch (the left should be set to 8); if min- and max-lux are not used - use: L 0 0 5 6 same as 1 but always dims if dim input is ON 7 same as 2 but always dims if dim input is ON 8 same as 3 but always dims if dim input is ON 9 plc control (dims if I/O 1008 is ON) min and max-lux not used - use: L 0 0 9 10 use two dimming inputs ( 4 & 5 ) min and max-lux used to set % for dimming steps between 100 and 0 % - like: L 66 33 10 both inputs OFF => no dim ( 100 % ) input 4 ON and input 5 OFF => first dim step ( 66 % in example ) input 4 OFF and input 5 ON => second dim step ( 33 % in example) both inputs ON => full dim ( 0 % ) 11 mixed plc/sensor/remote dimming plc controls dimming using I/O 1008 and 1009: 1009=0 1008=0 => sensor dimming (same as 1) 1009=0 1008=1 => remote dimming (same as 4) 1009=1 1008=0 => no dim ( 100% ) 1009=1 1008=1 => full dim ( 0% ) 12 16 step (4 bit) plc dimming min- and max-lux not used - use: L 0 0 12 plc controls dimming using I/O 1008, 1009, 1018 and 1019: 1008=0 1009=0 1018=0 1019=0 => no dim ( 100% ) 1008=1 1009=0 1018=0 1019=0 => ( 93% ) 1008=0 1009=0 1018=0 1019=1 => ( 46% ) 1008=0 1009=1 1018=1 1019=1 => ( 6% ) 1008=1 1009=1 1018=1 1019=1 => full dim ( 0% ) Filter parameter: F 3 10 filters the lux with a digital filter and time-constant 10 seconds. This parameter must be set if you are using light sensors for brightness control, oth- erwise you will get a flickering on the sign. The first parameter is the filter type: 1 average during set time 2 minimum during set time 3 digital filter with set time-constant SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 19 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger Output control: O 1 2 1-16 makes output 1 be activated, if input 1 is activated and chains 1-16 don't have any errors. The first parameter is the output-number, the second output mode followed by a list of affected chains or min- and max-lux for mode 100..103 - like this: O 2 100 500 600 activates output 2 when lux-value is <= 500 and deactivates when lux-value > 600 Output modes: 0 group chain-error 1 1-8, 2 9-16, 3 17-24, 4 25-32 (default) 1 chain-error 2 follow input if no error 3 follow I/O 1000+n if no error 4 follow I/O 1000+n if no error and set I/O 1000+n to chain status 100 output turns ON if lux-value is <= min-lux and OFF when > max-lux if both min-lux and max-lux is zero (O ? 100 0 0) then the output turns ON when the chains are dimmed 101 output turns ON if lux-value is <= min-lux or dim input is active, turns OFF when lux-value > max-lux and dim input is inactive if both min-lux and max-lux is zero (O ? 101 0 0) then the output goes ON when the chains are dimmed 102 output turns ON if lux-value is > max-lux and OFF when <= min-lux if both min-lux and max-lux is zero (O ? 102 0 0) then the output turns OFF when the chains are dimmed 103 output turns ON if lux-value is > max-lux and dim input is inactive, turns OFF when lux-value <= min-lux or dim input is active if both min-lux and max-lux is zero (O ? 103 0 0) then the output turns OFF when the chains are dimmed Error status settings: E 3 2 1-5 10 16-20 activates I/O 903 if the number of chains with errors exceeds 2. The first parameter is the I/O index (1-8) of the error status bit, the second is the maximum number of chains with errors allowed followed by a list of checked chains. Optional ChainBus settings: B 1 5 makes this chaindriver the master connected to five slaves. The first parameter is the mode: 0 not active (default) 1 master, second parameter number of slaves (1-8) 2 slave, second parameter slave-id (1-8) SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 20 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger Dip switch mode: D 1 1.0 2.0 3.0 6.0 makes the right dip switch control the blink time between 1.0 3.0 (0 - min) and 2.0 6.0 (F - max) the first parameter is the mode and the rest are different depending on mode: 1 blink time (4 times - min/max ON time and min/max OFF time) 2 first timer (2 times - min and max time) 3 minimum current (1 range - 1-99 max part of range min-max in %) Automatic chain test: A 20 3600 20 93 tests chains (ON or OFF) every hour (3600) with 20 seconds delay between each chain by setting the chain dac to 93 and waiting 20 cycles before reading the chain current. The first parameter is the chain-interval (in seconds) between testing chains, the second parameter is the wait-time between testing chain 32 and chain 1, the third parameter is the number of cycles to wait before reading the chain current and the last parameter is the dac value used. Sync blink input: S 201 forces a sync of blink time when input 201 goes high the parameter is a plc input (default 0 => disabled) used to get a full first cycle when starting for instance a wigwag Option bits: X 3 turns on option bit 3 - current select option using plc bits 1011-1017 X can be followed by several option bits (1..8) to turn on an option: 2 Writable symbol bits option: This option bit makes it possible to send symbol bits from master plc program to all slaves using symbol bits 233-264. When this option bit is ON symbol bits 233-264 received with ChainCom are ignored. 3 Current select option: This option makes it possible to switch between two different currents. If plc bit 1011 is ON, chains using current 1 will instead use current 2. Plcbit 1011 is for current 1 up to plc bit 1017 for current 7. 4 Disable plc blink sync: The program tries to stretch the plc cycle close to blink timer change by waiting up to 30ms - use this option to disable this and have same function as of old. 5 AC inputs option: Makes program poll digital inputs every 3-5 milliseconds. Input is considered to be ON as soon as it is polled on, but must be polled as OFF for 20 milliseconds before it is considered to be OFF. 6 Analogue lux-sensor option: Makes the program use two analogue lux-sensors in- stead of the fibre for light measurements. The scaling is fixed to 60000 lux at 10V. 7 Analogue plc inputs option: Uses analogue inputs as digital inputs 6 and 7. When using ChainBus inputs 6 and 7 is copied to 166 and 167 in slave (and master) disa- bling normal function which is to copy I/O 1006 and 1007 to 166 and 167 in slave (and master). The inputs turn ON at 4 volt and OFF at 3 volt. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 21 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger Chain current(s): I 1.0 2.0 1-3 5 7 9 11-13 this sets the current for chains 1,2,3,5,7,9,11,12,13. The first current is the minimum current which is used when the dimming input is ON, the second current is the maximum current which is used if the dimming input is OFF (when the light sensor is used the current will be set between min and max according to the light). Last is a list of affected chains. As you can see it's possible to enter ranges of chains. To set a different current for some other chains enter: I 3.0 4.0 4 6 10 14-20 It's possible to enter up to eight different currents. Plc-program to control the chains: A 1 = 1-3 7 If input 1 is ON chains 1,2,3,7 will be turned on A 2 A 0 = 11 A 2 AN 0 = 12 Input 0 is the blink input. If input 2 is ON, chain 11 and 12 will be blinking. Chain 11 will be ON when chain 12 is OFF and vice versa. Input 5 can be used as normal input as well as for dimming. Blink and inputs from master by ChainBus 160-167. Symbol bits by ChainCom are numbered 201-264. Timer input bits 701-708. Timer output bits 801-808. Error status bits 901-908. Fail safe bit 991. I/O-bits for plc-program use 1001-1032. Status bits readable with ChainCom use 301-332. Status bits (in master) read from slaves status bits (301- 308) use 11-18 for slave 1 up to 81-88 for slave 8. The Plc instructions are: A and AN and not O or ON or not To activate the configuration, enter: END The system should display RUN> To see a list of the current configuration, enter: .CONFIG To save the configuration to eeprom, enter: SAVE SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 22 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger The saved configuration will be used the next time when the system starts up with the dip-switch set to 0 or A0-BF. If the configuration is finished it should look like this: Table 5-1 Configuration of a AV2014 SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 23 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 5.4.4 Transfer the configuration into the LChD If you are finished with the configuration you have to send it to the LChD. Here the instructions: Open the Hyperterminal Program. This is a Windows standard program to upload the configuration to the master and slaves and make simple tests Start Hyper Terminal and make a new connection like in the picture. Figure 5-11 Hyper Terminal settings SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 24 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger Connect the LED Chain Driver over a crossed RS232 Cabel (0-Modem-Cable) to the Computer to the serial port. Set both rotary switches on the LED Chain Driver to “0”. Press the reset button on the LED Chain Driver, now the Hyperterminal displays: Application RAM installed „Versionsnumber“ RUN> Now copy all program lines from the .xls file and send it with edit, paste in the Hyperterminal to the LED Chain Driver. You have to copy only the first column from the excel file including config and save. If the hyperterminal displays no Error, the program is successful installed! SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 25 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger STAT displays system status including all chains with errors: ChainsOpen - transistor voltage < 2 V and chain current < 10 mA when chain is on supply voltage too low, to many leds in chain or no chain connected ChainsShort - transistor voltage > 75 % of supply voltage when chain is OFF, supply voltage too high or too few leds in chain ChainsLimitingCurrentTemp - the transistor power loss is too high, temperature above 70 degrees, max power is 300 mW below 70 degrees, decreasing to 0 mW at 90 degrees; error remains even when chain is turned OFF; reset when temperature goes below 60 degrees ChainsLimitingCurrent - the transistor power loss is too high, supply voltage too high or too few leds in chain, max power is 300 mW below 70 degrees; error remains even when chain is turned OFF ChainsLowCurrent - the current can't reach the configured current, max current is 25 mA; error remains even when chain is turned OFF; Minimum Chain transistor voltage is the voltage between chain and ground for the longest chain that is ON. The voltage includes the voltage drop over the current meas- urement resistor (27 ohm). When this voltage is equal to the voltage on the resistor; there is nothing left for the transistor to control the current with, and the chain current will be too low. When the current is below 10 mA the Chain will report as Open if this voltage falls below 2 V. Chainbus master displays slave status and chain errors It's possible to add comments to the configuration using “;”, and the rest of the line will be considered a comment. This is especially useful when sending the configuration using Hyperterminal or similar programs. Calibrating the Light sensor. The fibre light sensor returns a value of µA/cm². This is converted to a light value in lux by multiplying the sensor value with the lux factor. The default value is 1.0 (if the factor has never been set). The function LUX displays the current lux factor and then displays the light value until CR is pressed. There are two ways to set the lux factor: • Enter the factor as a decimal figure(at least one decimal) like this: LUX 5.0 This sets the factor to 5.0, displays the new factor and displays the light value. • Enter the lux value to be returned by the light sensor (read from an external lightsensor): LUX 2000 Then the program calculates the lux factor from the current sensor reading, displays the new factor and displays the light value. When using analogue lux-sensors (X 6) the LUX function is disabled as the scaling factor is fixed to 60000 lux at 10V. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 26 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 5.5 Replacement of a LED chain If one LED of a chain is broken, all LED’s of the chain will go OFF – the chain has to be replaced: 1. The faulty chain is indicated by a flashing control LED next to the LED chain terminal. 2. Switch off the power supply! 3. If a LED chain cover plate is mounted, take off the plate. 4. Unplug the LED chain. Untangle the chain and remove all condenser lenses including the LED’s of the affected chain from the front lens. 5. Plug in the condenser lenses of the spare chain into the front optic. If you hear a “click” it’s mounted correctly. 6. After replacing all light dots, put the cables of the chain into the cable channel (if mounted) and connect the plug to the LED chain driver again - same output! 7. Switch on the power and test the LED chain before mounting the chain cover plate (if foreseen). Hint: Sometimes it is not possible to remove a LED chain in one piece. In this case you have to cut the wires of the faulty chain first to get it out partly or you can even leave it in. Note: Using SF2100 controller in combination with LED chain module SF4007 the LED error is stored until the replaced LED chains are tested again. The reported LED error is not cleared by resetting the controller unit! To force the SF2100 controller testing all available LED chains a special hyperterminal command is available. This command is called serviceledtest and activates all LEDs for a short period and performs a test of all LED chains. Use this command to reset the reported LED errors after replacement of the LED chains. If this is not possible you have to wait until the normal “single LED test” is performed for all LEDs. This takes in general about 3 minutes per LED chain. 5.6 Changing a lightsensor (analogue) If the unit is defect replace it as follows: 1. Switch off the power of the VMS! 2. Pull off the 3 pin connector. 3. Screw off the two nuts. 4. Extract now the lightsensor straight backwards. To install a new unit, follow the steps in reversed order. Attention: the photo diode has to be plugged into the lens without bending it! Note: Electronics must be transported in ESD packaging. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 27 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 6 Instructions for storage, installation, commissioning, inspection and operation of Variable Message Traffic Signs (VMS) Please follow strictly these instructions concerning intermediate storage, installation, commissioning, cleaning and maintenance of Variable Message Traffic Signs. The non-compliance of these instructions may result in damages to the displays which are not covered by warranty. Variable Message Traffic Signs made by SWARCO FUTURIT partly consist of elec- tronic components that require careful and competent handling. The execution of works is exclusively reserved to skilled and authorized personnel. All relevant national and international Safety Regulations and Standards must be observed. 6.1 Storage of Units • Units must be stored on firm and flat ground in standard position. • During storage all door locks must be tightly locked in order to avoid ingress of dust and moisture. • SWARCO FUTURIT recommends storage of units in the original packaging; otherwise the unit must be protected against toppling. Please consider that especially big VMS provide a huge area for wind loads. Take appropriate precautions (indoor storage, windless site, anchoring, …) to prevent damage of hu- man and animal. • Units must not be exposed to environmental conditions other than normal operation. In particular, during open-air storage period longer than four weeks condensing water inside the VMS must be avoided. A weatherproofed hall is the most safe way to achieve best conditions for storage of VMS; if such hall is not available, precautions shall be taken not to expose VMS to temperatures less then +5°C; if this cannot be guaranteed either, condensing water during storage must be prevented by connecting the VMS to nominal voltage according to the electrical wiring plan. By switching on main switches, line safety switches, faulty current circuit breaker, normal operating condition is realized by the activation of the power supplies, controller, boards and the optional built-in heating and ventilation system. • In case of outdoor storage exceeding 4 weeks, units with built in heating and ventilation must be con- nected to electrical supply one week before installation. Heating and ventilation shall be on. • Units stored outdoors must not be covered with shrink foil. 6.2 Lifting of Units • When lifting units all relevant safety regulations shall be maintained. • When setting units down excessive shocks shall be avoided. • Wrong handling or manipulation not in accordance with the instructions may harm the unit’s integrity and could result into loss of warranty. • Any unit manipulation must be documented by photographs and sent to SWARCO FUTURIT if re- quested. • During installation, by lifting and swivelling occurs highest mechanical stress during the lifetime of the Variable Message Sign, by torsion and impacts. This stress can lead to a slight loosening of the mount- ing of the circuit boards. As a result of which LEDs are no longer positioned exactly to the lenses. In the course of start-up of the sign, after placing the VMS in its final position, the mounting of the LED circuit boards must be checked and re-adjusted. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 28 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger Lifting with a crane: • Secure all movable parts. • Remove packaging and transport safety supports. • Keep doors and all locks securely locked. • Use marked lifting points only. • Minimum angle between lifting strap or chain and lifting point is 60°. • All lifting points have to be used together. • Distribute weight equally over all marked lifting points. Lifting with cross beam support Lifting with a forklift truck: • Unit width with more than 3 m: pick-up at gravity centre position, distance between lifting forks minimum 1/3 of unit width. 6.3 Mechanical mounting and adjustment of VMS • Mounting points are defined in the drawing of the enclosure. • Units must be fixed at the marked mounting points only. ALL mounting points must be used accordingly to fix the unit. In case of deviations a written permission must be obtained from SWARCO FUTURIT before mounting. • The opening of doors must not be restricted by mounting elements. • During mounting the doors must be kept closed to avoid ingress of parts, dust and moisture. • In order to ensure the display’s optimal visibility, the unit must be correctly aligned. • For the alignment process maybe the radius of curves and topographic inclinations have to be taken into consideration. • All openings (e.g. when removing lifting devices or unused cable intakes) must be tightly sealed. • Stainless steel screws have to be greased before usage to avoid that they are going to be brayed. • Greased stainless steel screws have to be tightened with following torque: Thread Torque size M6 6 Nm M8 15 Nm M10 30 Nm M12 50 Nm M16 120 Nm M20 240 Nm • VMS by SWARCO FUTURIT are basically designed for a fixed installation and not for using them in a mobile application on trailers or comparable. If the sign is going to be used in such an application, it’s absolutely necessary to pass this information to SWF when requesting an offer and placing an order. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 29 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 6.3.1 Adjustment of VMS Variable message traffic signs are optical information displays which are focusing the light to the street in a certain angle. Thus VMS might have to be adjusted in relation to the location. 6.3.1.1 Vertical inclination Depending on the slope of the street, VMS must be adjusted accordingly: Standard 1° inclination! No inclination at downward slope! Inclination +1° additionally to the uphill slope! SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 30 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 6.3.1.2 Horizontal adjustment According to the topological area the signs shall be mounted in different ways. Planning must consider topo- logical conditions – e.g. curve radius, readability distance, but also maximum speed of the cars, type of sign. VMS shall be adjusted in a way that the driver remains inside the beam width of the VMS during the necessary reading distance. reading distance Y: This is the ambient area of the VMS; according to the used optic, installation height, active display width etc. the driver is outside the beam width of the light dots; the VMS is not fully readable! This is at the same time the minimum reading distance. In case of mounting the VMS beside the street, the distance to the viewing line of the driver has to be considered. reading section X: This is the section in which the content of the sign is visible and readable for the driver; this sectionis addicted to the symbol size and letter height, luminous inten- sity, contrast, curve radius, the beam with of the sign etc. At larger distances sym- bols might be visible but not any more legible. reading distance X+Y: This is the maximum distance to read the content of the sign. Sample drawing: SIDE – MOUNTING OVER - HEAD - MOUNTING viewing line viewing line SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 31 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger Installation height Speed Reading Reading Active display width Appropriate letter height distance distance Y Optic Diameter of circle X+Y Side mounting h= 2m till 50 km/h Display width till 3,5m Ca. 10m Letter height = 100mm Ca. 60m Using optic B3 d = 500mm Side mounting h= 2m till 50 km/h Display width till 5m Ca. 10m Letter height = 100mm Ca. 60m Using optic B5 d = 500 Side mounting h= 2m Till 80 km/h Display width till 1,6m Ca. 5m Letter height = 160mm Ca. 90m Using optic B4 d = 650 mm Side mounting h= 2m Till 80 km/h Display width till 2,5m Ca. 5m Letter height = 160mm Ca. 90m Using optic B6 d = 650 mm Side mounting h= 2m Till 80 km/h Display width till 2,5m Ca. 2m Letter height = 160mm Ca. 90m Using optic B7 d = 650 mm Side mounting h= 4m Display width till 5,5m Ca. 16m Using optic B4 Side mounting h= 4m Display width till 8m Ca. 16m Using optic B6 Side mounting h= 5m Depending on letter height respectively dimen- Display width 10m Ca. 44m sion of graphical symbols Using optic B3 Side mounting h= 5m Display width 10m Ca. 22m Using optic B6 Side mounting h= 5m Display width 12m Ca. 10m Using optic B7 Over-head mounting h=7m Till 100 km/h Display width till 10m Ca. 66m Letter height = 240mm Ca. 150m Using optic B1, B2, B3 or B5 d = 850 mm Over-head mounting h=7m till 130 km/h Display width till 10m Ca. 33m Letter height = 320mm Ca. 200m Using optic B4 or B6 d = 1050 mm Over-head mounting h=7m till 130 km/h Display width till 10m Ca. 16m Letter height = 320mm Ca. 200m Using optic B7 d = 1050 mm Above shown relations of speed and legibility are based on 5s reading time of the VMS – the driver stays at least 5s within the reading section X. Beam width classes acc. to EN 12966: Class acc. to. EN 12966 Horizontal beam width Vertical beam width B1 +/- 5° - 5° B2 +/- 7° - 5° B3 +/-10° - 5° B4 +/-10° - 10° B5 +/- 15° - 5° B6 +/- 15° - 10° B7 +/- 30° - 20° SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 32 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 6.4 Electrical connection • Do not damage any components when leading cables through the cable inlet. • Seal the cable inlets tightly. • Reduce over length of cables inside and outside the unit. • Remove loose parts inside the unit. • In order to avoid ingress of water, never carry out electrical works at humid or wet conditions. • When doing the potential equalization, use the M10 screw which is usually located next to the cable glands. To avoid contact corrosion use only a cable lug which is made out of stainless steel (V4A). First attach contact disk to the sign, then cable lug, washer and finally lock washer. Mount the cable lug in a way that the wire is aligned downwards (+/- 30°). Insolate the crimping area with appropriate material avoiding water to penetrate between cable lug and wire. • Hint: SWARCO FUTURIT recommends to use an earth leakage circuit breaker in the roadside cabinet of VMS. • Incoming cables (voltage and data) have to be separated from internal wiring to avoid induction of over- voltage and EMC otherwise internals protection devices become effectless. 6.5 Cable glands Possible sealing range of standard cable glands M 32 with Inlet M 25 without Inlet M 20 M 16 M 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 Mounting instructions Remove marker or put the marker outside For big cable Ø remove the inlet. Insert a flat screw driver into the mould parting line and then remove the inlet. Thread size Max. tightening torques Wrench size M12 1,5 Nm 17 M16 4,5 Nm 20 M20 8,0 Nm 24 M25 10,0 Nm 30 M32 12,0 Nm 36 The tightening torque depends on used cables and the insert sealing; it should not exceed the figures stated in the table! Use appropriate tooling! (socket wrench – see picture) SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 33 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 6.6 Third party components • It is not allowed to fix third party components (e.g. cameras, sensors) to the unit or feed third party supply or communication lines through the unit. If such installations cannot be avoided, a written per- mission must be obtained from SWARCO FUTURIT in advance. 6.7 Commissioning • Before switching the unit on, the voltage at the terminals and their correct connections (phase, neutral) must be checked. • Before putting the unit into operation, its interior must be checked for humidity traces. The unit must not be taken into operation when humidity traces are visible. 6.8 How to display traffic colours on full colour variable message traffic signs Full colour Variable Message Traffic Signs from SWARCO FUTURIT are fulfilling all demands of EN 12966 regarding colour class and luminance intensity. Due to the reason that there are a lot of colour mixtures possible it’s necessary to observe some rules to obtain that traffic colours are displayed in accordance with the standard. • Traffic colours defined in the European standard are set at SWARCO FUTURIT ex factory. • All six defined traffic colours (acc. to EN 12966) are stored within the internal memory of the sign controller. To display appropriate colours, these settings have to be used. • When creating Bitmap contents (24 bit colour depth *.bmp + correct Pixel size of the active display area) it’s important to use correct colour settings to obtain traffic colours. • To support the general use and to avoid problems with changed colour settings of traffic colours, the display controller is automatically recalculating the colours into traffic colours. • Following RGB values are internally used for conversion to traffic colours. Traffic colour _R_ _G_ _B_ White 255 255 255 Yellow (amber) 255 255 0 Orange 255 128 0 Red 255 0 0 Green 0 255 0 Blue 0 0 255 • For VMS in RGB technology according EN 12966 just these bitmap coordinates are allowed. • To obtain demands regarding colour class C2 and defined luminance intensity these rules have to be used. Smallest deviations (e.g. 255/254/0) are resulting into big colour and brightness deviation (es- pecially at yellow, green and blue). Consequently these deviations are not correlating with require- ments of EN 12966. • For example: By using green (0/255/0) the colour which will be displayed is automatically converted into the correct traffic colour. (bluish green) So no pure green is displayed, some blue is added automatically to get bluish green. • Bitmap contents with Antialiasing (smooth edges) are basically possible, but just colours in accord- ance with the coordinates of the table are converted into traffic colours. • However, Antialiasing can be used for red without any problems, because there is no colour mixture used. For colour white it’s necessary to reduce all three settings to the same value (e.g. 128/128/128) • For all other traffic colours it’s not possible to use Antialiasing, due to the reason that there is no lin- ear reduction of the values possible and would end to big colour deviations and not matching the EN 12966. • SWRCO FUTURIT has developed a sign controller “Rainbow” in combination with the LED driver “ACHILLES” which is able to display more than 16 million colours. When demanding full coloured SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 34 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger contents (without converting colours into traffic colours) it’s possible to choose between the mode “traffic” and “commercial” (for more details check FuturitCom2 protocol description – chapter “setPa- rameter”) via the FUTURITCOM2 protocol. • In case of the traffic mode the above described process will be activated. Colours are converted into traffic colours. Bitmap contents with Antialiasing, other than above described exceptions, are not in accordance with the requirements for colours of variable message traffic sign’s standard EN 12966. • In case of the commercial mode the conversion of the colours is deactivated. The user is able to use all available 16 million colours. • Ex factory the traffic mode is activated. The mode is persistent stored into the memory of the sign controller. The result is that the last change is stored also after a restart of the system and will not be set back to the factory setting, In such a case it’s in the responsibility of the user to activate the traffic mode in combination with a traffic-content to drive the variable message traffic sign according to the standard EN 12966. 6.9 Inspection SWARCO FUTURIT assumes a precautionary inspection of the unit once a year in order keep the warranty of the VMS. If the units are mounted in exposed situation (increased dusty environment, location near by sea, increased risk of damage.) an inspection every six month might be necessary. Interval Recommended maintenance (month) 6 12 Visually inspection of the housing for any damages X X Inspection of hinges and locks X X Inspection of door sealing for damage X X Control the drainage holes and check if there is too much humidity in the sign X X Test FI protective switches (if applicable) X X Inspect over voltage protection units X X Inspection of ventilation, filter pads and heaters (if applicable) X X Check error messages X X Change of filter pads of the ventilation (if applicable) X Note: The rubber sealing gasket which is clipped to the housing have to be protected against embrit- tlement with a commercial rubber care product. It’s not needed to take precaution if the gaskets are foamed. 6.10 Software settings and configuration files Modification of sign settings or configuration files may result in functional problems and damages to the variable message traffic sign. Therefore an explicit written permission given by SWARCO FUTURIT must be obtained. Not authorized modifications of sign settings or configuration files are done at one’s own risk and are re- sulting in an immediately loss of warranty for the affected variable message traffic sign. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 35 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger 6.11 Cleaning • Avoid soiling of the unit with paints, coatings, mortar or similar substances. • The suitability of cleaning agents and solvents must be tested in each case; SWARCO FUTURIT does not take over any liability for such tests. • Fine scratches on the powder coating can be repaired with a varnish for powder coatings. A repair-set is available at the SWARCO FUTURIT After Sales Service. • Do not use high-pressure cleaners on front panels which carry reflective foils. • High-pressure cleaners may be used with a maximum working-pressure of 80 bars at a distance of 200 cm. Please note that some parts of the unit are classified as IP X4. It is not allowed to direct the jet of water directly onto rubber sealing or ventilation openings. • Cleaning recommendation: If a unit is soiled during transport, storage or setting up, clean it immediately with cold or hand-hot water. Is the soiling hard to remove, it’s possible to use a neutral or low-alkaline cleaning agent. Use only clean water, if necessary with a small amount (1/50) of neutral or low-alkaline cleaning agent and a smooth, non abrasive cloth or industrial cotton wool for smooth surfaces. Avoid excessive rubbing or brushing. To remove greasy, oily or sooty substances use aroma-free white spirit or isopropyl alcohol. Remnants of glues, silicon latex or adhesive tapes can also be removed in this way. The temperature of cleaning agents shall not exceed 25°C. Do not use steam-jet cleaners. During the cleaning process the surface of the housings must not exceed a temperature of 25°C. The maximum residence time of cleaning agents must not exceed 15 minutes and drying of the cleaning agent must be avoided. Rinse immediately with clean, cold water after every cleaning process. The cleaning frequency for components exposed to outside atmospherically influences depends on the nature of the parts and the aggressiveness of the atmospherically conditions. In order to prevent dam- age to surfaces, the following cleaning intervals should be respected and documented: Minimum 2-year interval for locations not exposed to an industrial environment with a distance of more than 5.000 meters from the sea not exposed to grit from winter service Minimum 1-year interval for locations exposed to an industrial environment lying close to the sea exposed to grit from winter service inside tunnels Further recognized cleaning recommendations can be found at the following companies: GRM-RAL GZ 632 („Gütegemeinschaft für die Reinigung von Metallfassaden“, Nürnberg) Verband der Fenster und Fassadenhersteller, Frankfurt/Main, (Merkblatt VFF-WP.05) Qualicare: Verband für Qualität von Reinigung und Unterhalt bei Metallfassaden , Zürich. • Exclusions: Do not use solvents containing ester, ketone, alcohol, aromates, glycol ether or halogenated hydrocar- bons or similar. Do not use scratching or abrasive cleaning agents. Do not use heavily acid or alkaline cleaning or wetting agents. Do not use cleaning agents of unknown composition. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 36 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger ANNEX A: OPE Calculation To compare the technical performance of different products several properties have to be measured and bal- anced. Important figures are power consumption, light output, light distribution, readability and legibility, reliability and durability. A measure for the power consumption is the LED-current. Test reports, which approve the compliance with optical requirements, have to contain operating current of the LED; if not, the report cannot be used for ap- proval, because any light intensity can be achieved by simply increasing the LED-current, which will reduce the life time of the LED and will increase the degradation of light output dramatically. Requirements always ask for minimum light intensity, according to the application. By comparing different products the light output (luminance) according to the data confirmed by the test report has to be used. Lumi- nance is depending on the used pixel-pitch (resolution of light dots), why this has also to be considered, as well as the number of light sources of the same colour per element (light dot). Light distribution according to the required application is approved and confirmed by the test report by meas- urement of the beam width according to EN 12966. Readability and legibility is determined by the value of contrast ratio. Test report of a representative test module has to approve the achieved luminance (contrast) ratio value. Reliability and durability are very important attributes for variable message traffic signs. Lifetime and stability of the optical performance is mainly depending on the current load of the LED, the relation between the operating current and the maximum allowed current. Therefore the maximum current allowed for driving the LED has to be provided with the data sheet of the LEDs used in the VMS to verify reliability and durability. According to EN 12966 requirements have to be met for at least 10 years, also optical demands shall still be achieved after ten years. Therefore degradation and aging effects have to be avoided for at least ten years. This is only possible if the current load is as low as possible. Graphic above shows the relation between operating current and degradation of light output, depending on the operating current. Due to different performance f LED‘s operating current is given as ratio to the maximum current allowed. Horizontal axis shows the operating hours. SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 37 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger All above described attributes are integrated and respected by a formula, verifying the Optical Performance Efficiency (OPE) × × × × = × table 1 FBW table 2 FL LR: achieved luminance ratio (see test report by Notified Body) B1 0,005 L1 0,25 IN [mA]: maximum allowed forward current (see LED data sheet) B2 0,007 L1(*), L2 0,5 B3 0,010 L2(*), L3 1 FBW: beam width acc. EN 12966-1 (see test report and table 1) B4 0,020 L3(*) 2 pp [mm]: element spacing (pixel pitch) acc. to definition of EN 12966-1 B5 0,015 a: number of light sources per element, LEDs of the same colour per pixel B6 0,030 I [mA]: operating current to meet requirement on luminance and luminance ratio B7 0,120 (see test report of CE-Certificate) FL: factor depending on the achieved luminance class acc. to EN 12966-1 (see test report of CE-Certificate and table 2) Example: 3G6 RGB, 20mm, L3(*),R3,B6,C2 white remarks LR 27 see test report FC20_3G6_RBA_2015(E) IN 110 see datasheet NSSM225AT B6 acc. to testreport FC20_3G6_RBA_2015(E) and Certificate of constancy of FBW 0,03 performance_GB14-91533-00(E)_2015, table 106 see testreport FC20_3G6_RBA_2015(E) Certificate of constancy of pp 20 performance_GB14-91533-00(E)_2015, table 106 a 1 acc. to OPE documentation see testreport FC20_3G6_RBA_2015(E) Certificate of constancy of I 6,21 performance_GB14-91533-00(E)_2015, table 106 L3* acc. to testreport FC20_3G6_RBA_2015(E) Certificate of constancy of FL 2 performance_GB14-91533-00(E)_2015, table 106 OPE 1848 OPE= (LR*IN*FBW *pp²*FL)/(a*I²) SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 38 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger ANNEX 1: Drawing of Matrix ANNEX 2: Drawing of Housing ANNEX 3: Circuit diagram SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 39 / 41 Version 1.0 SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION Ges.m.b.H. 10006764-EEIB Foor-Fahrtrichtungsanzeiger CHANGES OF DOCUMENT Version Date Changes Responsibility 0.1 04.12.2018 Initial document Manuela Giefing 1.0 06.12.2018 Changes and release Günter Nussbaumer SWARCO Futurit Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. VERTRIEB/TECHNIK/VERWALTUNG: A-2380 Perchtoldsdorf, Mühlgasse 86, Tel. +43-1-895 79 24, Fax: +43-1-894 21 48, email: [email protected] PRODUKTION/EINKAUF: A-7343 Neutal, Manfred-Swarovski-Str. 1, Tel: +43-2618-20025-0, Fax: +43-2618-20025-50, Internet: http://www.swarcofuturit.com Bankverbindung: CA AG Kto.-Nr. 0389-5656 100, BLZ 11890, UID-Nr./VAT no/TVA: ATU 14699806, DVR: 0748331 Sitz der Gesellschaft: Neutal, Firmenbuchgericht: Handelsgericht Eisenstadt 06.12.2018 FB 7.3-6 40 / 41 Version 1.0 Further information: SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme GmbH Manfred-Swarovski-Straße 1 A-7343 Neutal TEL.: +43-2618-200 25-0 FAX: +43-2618-200 25-50 URL: www.swarcofuturit.com The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate at the time of publication. However, no responsibility or liability is taken by SWARCO FUTURIT for technical inaccuracies, typographical errors and omissions. The information in this document is subject to modifications and amendments without prior notice. No part of this document may be reproduced, changed or commercialized without the express written consent of SWARCO FUTURIT. © SWARCO FUTURIT 2018 NICHT GESTATTET, SOWEIT NICHT AUSDRÜCKLICH ZUGESTANDEN. ZUWIDERHANDLUNGEN VERPFLICHTEN ZUM SCHADENSERSATZ. ALLE RECHTE VORBEHALTEN, © ALLE RECHTE BEI SWARCO FUTURIT VERKEHRSSIGNALSYSTEME GESMBH. DIE WEITERGABE SOWIE VERVIELFÄLTIGUNG UND MITTEILUNG DIESES INHALTES IST © THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SWARCO FUTURIT VERKEHRSSIGNALSYSTEME GESMBH. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED INSBESONDERE FÜR DEN FALL DER PATENTIERUNG. Index Änderungsnr.: Änderung bzw. Ergänzung Datum Durchgeführt von Geprüft von A ... symbol, reflective film 170818 WEISZL PETER B ... symbol, reflective film 290818 WEISZL PETER ... ... ... ... ... ... Datum Name Gezeichnet & geprüft 020818 FREYLER First in Traffic Solutions. Geprüft & freigegeben 020818 SEBESTA SWARCO FUTURIT Zuletzt kontrolliert 020818 ERNST Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. www.swarco.com Maßstab Zeichnungsnummer Index 1:10 LED-Display 75949310- 01 B Allgemein D700 Ersatz für: ... Format toleranz EN ISO 13920 ... D Ersetzt durch: ... A4 "B" & "F" NICHT GESTATTET, SOWEIT NICHT AUSDRÜCKLICH ZUGESTANDEN. ZUWIDERHANDLUNGEN VERPFLICHTEN ZUM SCHADENSERSATZ. ALLE RECHTE VORBEHALTEN, © ALLE RECHTE BEI SWARCO FUTURIT VERKEHRSSIGNALSYSTEME GESMBH. DIE WEITERGABE SOWIE VERVIELFÄLTIGUNG UND MITTEILUNG DIESES INHALTES IST © THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SWARCO FUTURIT VERKEHRSSIGNALSYSTEME GESMBH. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED INSBESONDERE FÜR DEN FALL DER PATENTIERUNG. Index Änderungsnr.: Änderung bzw. Ergänzung Datum Durchgeführt von Geprüft von ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Datum Name Gezeichnet & geprüft 020818 FREYLER First in Traffic Solutions. Geprüft & freigegeben 020818 SEBESTA SWARCO FUTURIT Zuletzt kontrolliert 020818 ERNST Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. www.swarco.com Maßstab Zeichnungsnummer Index 1:5 LED-Display M7962 . Allgemein Ø700x150 Ersatz für: ... Format toleranz ISO 2768 -mL ... ... Ersetzt durch: ... A2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 © Copyright SWARCO according to ISO 16016 communication of its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design. The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the A A SWARCO FUTURIT Verkehrssignalsysteme Ges.m.b.H. B Manfred-Swarovski-Straße 1 B 7343 Neutal, AUSTRIA Drawing number: EB000490 C Type designation: C VMS-L-DM-700-KO-LCD-L3*-B3 PRESCRIBED DIRECTION LM-421-OPTION Voltage: Frequency: Internal fuse: Recommended external fuse: 24VDC - 2A-C 4A-C D D Maximum power consumption: Typical power consumption: Overvoltage protection in sign: 5W 4W OVP class II Power ratings may deviate ±10% from stated values due to tolerances of electrically/electronically devices and environmental conditions. Date of creation: 06.09.2018 Last change: 0 Fr / Re 06.09.2018 E E Print date / Time stamp 10.09.2018 / 12:42 Created with F ( Reference: ... ) *EB000490-0* EB000490-0 F 0 Fr / Re 06.09.2018 TL Created 06.09.2018 Cover Sheet EB000490 Created by Lämmermayer Audited 06.09.2018 VMS-L-DM-700-KO-LCD-L3*-B3 Sheet 1 10028 Ø 700 x 150 Revision Change Date Name Audited by Wolf 4 Sh. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 © Copyright SWARCO according to ISO 16016 communication of its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design. The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the No rules for behaviour on LED-chain failure programmed. arrow right A A down LED-chain 2m WH 13LP LED-chain 2m WH 13LP LED-chain 2m WH 13LP LED-chain 2m WH 13LP LED-chain 2m WH 13LP Image 1 B B -P5 -P4 -P3 -P2 -P1 -+-+-+-+-+ 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LED-chain slots 17-32 LED-chain slots 1-16 automatic brightness control via integrated sensors -A1 R+ R- 0V 5V T- T+ -B1 -B2 Futurit LED Chain Driver RS485 COM3 light sensor light sensor front side rear side screw terminals C 0.14-1.5mm² C - + out - + out 26-16AWG DIP switches COM2 Digital OUT Power IN Analog IN COM1 1 2 9-pin D-Sub male max 48V= max +10V Digital IN RS485 RS232 LSYY-OZ LSYY-OZ 0..F 0..F 3x0,75mm² 3x0,75mm² - + 0VA1+0VA2+ IC I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 R+ R- 0V 5V T- T+ OC O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 -T1 1,5mm² RD + + 1,5mm² BK - 10-32VDC + -XD 1 + 0,5mm² RD 0,5mm² RD 2 - 0,5mm² BK 0,5mm² BK 3 - 0,5mm² RD 4 0,5mm² RD 0,5mm² BK 30-56VDC - 0,5mm² RD 3N -F1 DC OK 0,5mm² RD 1 D screw terminals max. 2.5mm²/14AWG D 2A-C 33.6W (@48V) 4N 2 set output voltage! A -X2 2,5mm² RD PHOENIX CONTACT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PT1.5-TWIN 2,5mm² GNYE VAL-MS-T1/T2 0.14-1.5mm² 2,5mm² RD 2,5mm² BK (<10m) 48/12.5 ST -F0 + total lenght of incoming + outgoing wire (A+B): Digital IN (12-48VDC): Digital OUT (12-48VDC m ax 100m A): optimum <0.5m, at least <1m -X1 X2,1: Common GND X2,8: Common - B X2,2: Image 1 X2,9: OK Signal: Image 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 2 3 4 PE 2,5mm² GNYE X2,3-X2,7: Reserve X2,10: OK Signal LED Chain Driver PT4-TWIN E 0.2-4mm² E PT10-TWIN 0.5-10mm² + - PE 10mm² GNYE Dipswitch 1 has to be 8. Flashing frequency adjustable via dipswitch 2 (16 levels available). +24VDC Print date / Time stamp 0: 0,3 sec (ON/OFF) 1: 0,4 sec (ON/OFF) 10.09.2018 / 12:42 2: 0,5 sec (ON/OFF) ... Created with F: 1,8 sec (ON/OFF) Ensure a power supply which can deliver an appropriate short-circuit current to cause the safety device to trip Factory setting dipswitch 2: 2 (0,5 sec ON/OFF) if an error occurs. F F 0 Fr / Re 06.09.2018 TL Created 06.09.2018 Circuit Diagram EB000490 Created by Lämmermayer Audited 06.09.2018 VMS-L-DM-700-KO-LCD-L3*-B3 Sheet 2 10028 Ø 700 x 150 Revision Change Date Name Audited by Wolf 4 Sh. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E F A D B C Created with © Copyright SWARCO according to ISO 16016 0 The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the Print date / Time stamp communication of its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Revision 10.09.2018 / 12:42 Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design. 1 1 Fr / Re Change Date 2 2 06.09.2018 TL Audited Created Name Audited by Created by Wolf 06.09.2018 06.09.2018 Lämmermayer 3 1 3 2 -X1 3 -B2 4 PE -F0 -F1 -T1 1 -XD 2 -B 3 1 4 4 4 -A1 front view with open matrix door 1 2 3 4 5 -X2 6 7 8 9 10 10028 Layout Diagram 5 Layout Diagram 5 6 6 Ø 700 x 150 EB000490 side view with open matrix door VMS-L-DM-700-KO-LCD-L3*-B3 7 7 8 8 4 Sheet ISO A3 100 mm : 600 mm 3 Sh. F E B A D C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 © Copyright SWARCO according to ISO 16016 no. name ▲1 part of qty. {}▲ part … description manufacturer type communication of its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design. The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the 1 -F1 1 10002015 circuit breaker 2A-C, 1P+N ABB S201-C2NA 2 -F0 1 10002068 overvoltage protection Class I+II, max. 60VDC PHOENIX CONTACT VAL-MS-T1/T2 48/12.5/1+0 A A 3 -T1 1 10002974 DC/DC converter PHOENIX MINI-PS; IN: 10-32VDC / OUT: 30-56VDC, 0.7A PHOENIX CONTACT MINI-PS-12-24DC/48DC/0.7 4 -X2 1 10003270 terminal block Phoenix PT1.5, 0.14-1.5mm², X-Data 10 (1...10) PHOENIX CONTACT PT1.5-TWIN 5 -X1 1 10003275 terminal block Phoenix PT4, 0.2-4mm², X-DC (1-2,3-4) PHOENIX CONTACT PT4-TWIN 6 PE -X1 1 10003002 spring terminal PT10-TWIN, 0.5-10mm², green/yellow PHOENIX CONTACT PT10-TWIN 7 -X1 1 10003005 cover plate for PT10-TWIN terminals, grau PHOENIX CONTACT D-PT10-TWIN 8 -X1 1 10003006 marker strip for terminals ZB10 for PT10 terminals, "L1,L2,L3,N,PE" 2x PHOENIX CONTACT 1053412 9 -XD 1 10003275 terminal block Phoenix PT4, 0.2-4mm², X-DC (1-2,3-4) PHOENIX CONTACT PT4-TWIN 10 -A1 1 10004061 Futurit LED Chain Driver SWARCO M02517-E.00 B B 11 -P1...5 5 30005756 LED-chain 48VDC, 2m/260mm white, 13LP SWARCO 12 -B1, -B2 2 30006572 light sensor, analog, 0-60000 Lux SWARCO SF3048C C C D D E E Print date / Time stamp 10.09.2018 / 12:42 Created with F F 0 Fr / Re 06.09.2018 TL Created 06.09.2018 Bill of Material EB000490 Created by Lämmermayer Audited 06.09.2018 VMS-L-DM-700-KO-LCD-L3*-B3 Sheet 4 10028 Ø 700 x 150 Revision Change Date Name Audited by Wolf 4 Sh. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Viasis 3003 viasis the mobile and independent 1 speed indicator system User Manual Revision 4.1, 8 March 2017 Campusallee 1 via D-51379 Leverkusen traffic Germany controlling Tel. +49 - (0)2171 - 50 49 30 Fax. +49 - (0)2171- 50 49 50 GmbH Email: [email protected] Web: http://www.viatraffic.de 1 This system is based on a development supported with funds of the German ministry of research and technol- ogy with the project no. 35-250368, with the assistance of the German ‘Fraunhofer Gesellschaft ISE‘ TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 THE CONCEPT OF VISUAL SPEED INDICATION 1 2 GENERAL HINTS AND USED SYMBOLS 2 2.1 Used symbols and text forms 2 3 SYSTEM DELIVERY 2 3.1 Unpacking 2 3.2 Supply schedule and equipment 3 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 3 5 START-UP WITH THE VIASIS 4 5.1 Mounting and Fixation 4 5.2 Horizontal orientation 5 5.2.1 Leaving traffic 5 5.2.2 Crossing traffic 6 5.3 Viasis MINI text panel 6 5.4 Electrical preparation 7 6 VIASIS 3003 SOFTWARE AND DATA 8 6.1 Software installation 8 6.1.1 System requirements for the ViaApp 8 6.1.2 System requirements for viagraph 8 6.1.3 Installation and deinstallation of viagraph 9 6.2 Viasis 3003 data connections 10 6.2.1 Data connection with serial cable 10 6.2.2 Using an USB-RS232 serial adapter 12 6.2.3 USB host interface connection (optional) 13 6.2.3.1 Windows XP and Vista 32 bit USB device driver installation 14 6.2.3.2 Windows Vista 64, 7, 8, 8.1 USB driver installation 16 6.2.3.3 USB driver for Windows 10 18 6.2.4 USB client interface for USB flash storage sticks (optional) 19 6.2.4.1 Parameter transfer from and to the viasis using a USB memory stick 20 6.2.5 Bluetooth modem connection 22 6.2.6 Data connection by GSM radio modem, Email and SMS transfer 24 6.2.7 Manual selection of the viagraph communication (COM) port 26 6.3 Viasis settings and parameter sets 27 6.3.1 Parameter set 28 6.3.2 Time schedule 30 6.3.2.1 Time schedule – Led display 30 6.3.2.2 Time schedule – Operation weekdays 31 6.3.2.3 Time schedule – Daily start and daily stop time 31 6.3.3 Bidirectional detection 32 6.3.4 Menu Speed display options 33 6.3.4.1 Decimal places 33 6.3.4.2 Minimal - and maximal speed displayed 33 6.3.4.3 Threshold blinking LED 34 6.3.4.4 Threshold LED mixed color (Option) 34 6.3.4.5 Threshold LED color change 35 6.3.5 Optimizing display 35 6.3.6 Menu extensions thresholds 35 6.3.6.1 Thresholds LED circle symbols 36 6.3.6.2 Definition of symbols 37 6.3.6.3 LED Warning lights (Option) 38 6.3.6.4 Relays and power MOSFET transistors (optional) 39 6.3.6.5 LED display pages or additional LED fixed text (viasis PLUS or PLUS SMILE) 39 6.3.7 Radar sensitivity 41 6.4 Radio modems 41 6.4.1 Bluetooth modem 41 6.4.1.1 Bluetooth device name 42 6.4.1.2 Pin number 42 6.4.2 GSM/GPRS Modem 43 6.4.2.1 GSM/Email time schedule 43 6.4.2.2 SIM card PIN code 45 6.4.2.3 GPRS configuration 46 6.4.2.4 Configuring the SMTP-Server (Mail server) 47 6.4.2.5 E-mail configuration 49 6.4.2.6 Configure SMS 50 6.4.3 GPS Module (optional) 51 6.4.3.1 GPS position list 52 6.4.3.2 Formatted GPS data output 53 6.4.3.3 GPS raw data (NMEA-183 protocol) 54 6.4.3.4 GPS position fix time 54 6.5 Menu information and Time 55 6.5.1 Protocol 55 6.5.2 Comment – text field 56 6.5.3 System date and time 56 6.5.4 Daylight saving time 57 6.6 Online measurement 57 6.7 Data memory 58 6.7.1 Read measurement data 58 6.7.2 Checking stored measurement data 59 6.8 Test functions 60 6.9 Data evaluation 61 6.10 Viasis PLUS display 62 6.10.1 Viasis PLUS matrix editor – display pages 63 6.10.2 Viasis PLUS matrix editor – bitmaps 64 6.10.3 Bitmap editor 64 6.10.4 Matrix editor menu Tools 65 6.10.5 Permanent text page 65 6.11 Select switch option 66 7 TECHNICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 67 7.1 Distance range 67 7.2 Measurement angle 68 7.3 Accuracy 68 7.4 Display field and visibility 68 7.5 Display frequency 69 7.6 Power supply and operating time 69 7.6.1 Accumulator version 69 7.6.2 Mains supply 115/230 Volt AC version 69 7.6.3 Viasis with photovoltaic solar support 70 7.7 Operating temperature 70 7.8 Water protection 70 7.9 Radio wave interference 70 8 MAINTENANCE 71 8.1 Cleaning the front window pane 71 8.2 Charging and testing the lead acid battery 71 8.3 Changing the battery 72 8.4 Changing the fuse 72 8.5 Serial RS232 interface connector 72 8.6 Trouble shooting 73 8.7 Transport damages 74 8.8 Sending back/transport preparation/disposal 74 9 VIASIS 3003 CERTIFICATION, CONFORMITY AND COMPLIANCE 75 9.1 CE-conformity viasis 3003 75 9.2 Viasis 3003 CE compliance and notification 75 9.3 CE-conformity Bluetooth module Laird 730-SA 76 9.4 CE expertise M10 Quectel GSM/GPRS radio module 77 9.5 Viasis 3003 FCC and IC compliance 78 10 ANNEX 79 10.1 Viasis 3003 list of equipment 79 10.2 Technical Specifications viasis 3003 80 10.2.1 Supplementary data – viasis PLUS version 81 10.2.2 Supplementary data – viasis PLUS SMILE version 81 10.2.3 Supplementary data – viasis MINI version 81 10.2.4 Technical Data - Bluetooth modem 82 10.3 Technical data optional components 82 10.3.1 Technical data – Control panel USB 82 10.3.2 Technical data – 115V/230V mains supply 82 10.3.3 Technical data – solar module 83 10.3.4 Technical data – low voltage relays 83 10.3.5 Technical Data – MOSFET power transistors 83 10.3.6 Technical Data - GSM/GPRS radio module and SIM card slot 84 10.3.7 Technical Data – GPS module 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 1 The concept of visual speed indication The visual speed indication and thereby the attempt to influence the driver's speed is quite a new field in the common road and traffic technology, although the well known traffic lights are established since decades. Nowadays public authorities start to install luminary speed indication signs above highways for the same purpose and additionally to manage the traffic flow. Besides avoiding traffic jams, these systems also shall decrease the drivers speed in order to reduce the rate of accidents and the heaviness of their consequences. Our system of a mobile, autonomous and numerical speed indication display fulfils this aim especially in communal and urban areas, speed limit zones, living areas and in front of schools and nursery schools. If we look to the effects of such a speed display, we can state three main effects: The driver gets the speed of his car publicly displayed and realizes his „over speeding“. Therefore the most drivers will be set under psychological pressure and reduce their actual speed. The inhabitants of living areas with low speed zones can prove the driving speed of passing vehicles objectively and as far as local source and target traffic is concerned speak with well known „fast drivers“ personally. The communal authorities, often quite helpless with complaints of angry citizens about over speeding, get an appropriate tool to react. With this tool they delegate in a psychological way the control function to the concerned citizens. The police are and was never able to observe the mentioned low speed zones and living areas in a repressive manner effectively and the expenses for repressive supervision there are not covered by fines for over speeding drivers. By the way, whether repressive supervision of speed limitations in living areas is politically suitable is another question. Up to now the only possibilities of local administrations are road reconstructions to lower drivers speeding. But such steps are quite costly and under the aspect of the economic situa- tion of the communities, with low funds not longer practicable. The systems for visual speed indication however make sense in a wide area covering action. This wide area covering action just can be run by easy installable and transportable units, working completely independent for an appropriate time. Since 1994 via traffic controlling has delivered the speed measurement systems viasis with in- tegrated display. The viasis 3003 is an actual version of this system with low energy consumption, integrated battery buffered memory for speed and time data, serial data interface and a couple of different operating modes. The possibility not only to measure and to display speed data, but also to collect and herewith to analyze the collected values statistically grants a control of the effectiveness of the viasis systems in a certain traffic situation. In common speed data can be collected (with or without ‘publicly’ displayed speed on the board) and later on processed statistically permitting the system user profound statements about the car drivers speeding behavior on a certain road. This makes decisions for or against further measures, like road reconstruction, repressive speed controls and so on, much easier. Page 1 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 2 General hints and used symbols - Read the manual before you use the viasis system. - Forward the viasis to other persons only with a manual. - The viasis housing may only be opened by qualified personal. - If the viasis housing is opened by the customer, the manufacturer will reject any claims of warranty and guaranty. - The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the viasis device. - The following manual is valid for several variants of the viasis 3003 system, like viasis COMPACT, MINI, PLUS, PLUS SMILE... etc. 2.1 Used symbols and text forms Safety information, warning of a general danger, evidence of possible misuse or misconduct with serious conse- quences. Danger of hazardous voltages, mortal danger. Helpful hints, tips and recommendations Troubleshooting advice Standard text Normal text instructions Bold text Highlighting of important text passages Bold and italic text References to program texts, symbols and functions Information text: Program cited text passages 3 System delivery 3.1 Unpacking Unpack the delivered parcel with the viasis system immediately. From the outside invisible transport damages (see also chapter 8.7) can be enforced only a few days against the hauler. Please retain the original packaging, because if the equipment is sent back it should be packed only in the original packaging. We will gladly accept send back packing material, if it is not possible for you to store it due to a lack of storage space. Small parts and cables will be packed in the battery box. Please check the box when unpacking the system. Page 2 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 3.2 Supply schedule and equipment To the delivery containment of our systems belong following components: 1. Viasis speed measurement and display system for vehicle speeding 2. Fuses, 2 pieces (one spare piece) 3. Sliding nuts M6, 4 pieces for standard C-profile rails 4. Serial interface cable, about 4 meters long 5. CDROM with manual, terminal and data evaluation software 6. Option USB – USB cable and USB flash storage stick Measured and stored data from a viasis can be read with a personal computer, a notebook or laptop with serial RS232 interface and the delivered viagraph software working with Windows XP/Vista/7/8 and Windows 10. If you want to use the serial RS232 interface of the viasis, but your computer offers only a USB interface, you can obtain a serial USB-RS232 adapter from us, see annex chapter 10.1 – list of viasis equipment. 4 System description The viasis 3003 measures and displays vehicle speeds of one drive lane and direction. The viasis is an accumulator supplied, mobile measurement system, particularly designed for lowest power consumption. Measured speeds are shown on a 300 mm high, seven-segment LED board with 2 ½ digits. The used high brightness LED are mounted behind a rigid “phantom light” mask to avoid seemingly display of speeds due to sun or vehicle light reflection. Alternating with the numeric speed display, several warning and speed limit sign symbols with a circle diameter of 300 mm can be shown. Optionally the viasis 3003 is equipped with two LED display colors, with the possibility to change the displayed color according the compari- son result of measured vehicle speed and a set speed threshold. Measured vehicle speeds are stored in the viasis, marked with time and date of the measure- ment and can be later transferred by means of a serial communication interface like RS232, USB or other optional radio data interfaces, like Bluetooth or GSM/GPRS mobile phone. The viasis can be set to measure data of both driving directions of a two lane road and to store the data for later evaluation. Typically the viasis measures periodically every 1.5 seconds and shows the result. In case of a new vehicle measurement the display is refreshed after 1.5 seconds, otherwise the display is hold for maximal 3 seconds. The measuring unit consists of a continuous wave „Doppler Radar“, a permanent sending high frequency radio wave emitting and receiving unit, whose antenna is not visible through the front window pane. This measuring unit delivers the received signals by an amplifier and digital processing electronic to a microprocessor unit that evaluates the signals. The viasis 3003 is delivered with numerous options, see also chapter 6.3.6, in several variants like viasis COMPACT, MINI, PLUS, PLUS SMILE, etc. for various different applications. Page 3 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 5 Start-up with the viasis 5.1 Mounting and Fixation The viasis must be mounted orthogonal to the road and stable in a height of 2 meters till 4 meters below the housing edge, see . First mount the system and finally insert the battery. Illustration 1: Vertical orientation Following items must be observed: Another mounting height or a strong inclination of the housing (exceeding 90° ± 8°) may influence the distance range of the vehicle detection and the accuracy of the displayed speed values. The radar detector in the viasis needs „free sight“ on the measured vehicles. Avoid a mount- ing behind trees, poles, high parking vehicles and so on. The system shall not be used in the range of road turns and bends. Otherwise too low meas- ured speeds can be the result. For the fixation of the viasis at pole clamps use the delivered M6 slide nuts. Pull two slide nuts in each C-profile rail at the backside of the viasis housing. With 2 x 2 M6 screws (not deliv- ered) the pole clamp is fixed at the slide nuts, respectively the profile rails. We offer a solid and lockable pole fixation kit for the viasis, see annex list of equipment chap- ter 10.1 and our website www.viatraffic.de. If there is no possibility to mount to already existing poles or if the system is used only in short mobile campaigns, we also deliver a mobile tripod, see annex list of equipment, with a tele- scope pole. If you use a mobile tripod you should be aware that you need to guard the system! Page 4 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 5.2 Horizontal orientation Direct the system horizontally through turning the system board around the mounting pole. The ideal orientation to reach a maximum distance range depends on the local circumstances. Illustration 2: viasis display directed to the road with a measurement angle = 5° For the first the system should be straightened parallel the roadway and can be turned until a measurement angle of 5 to the lane (see illustration 2) until the vehicles are detected from the unit at the maximum distance range. If leaving traffic reduces the distance range remarkably, the system board can also be turned away from the roadway up to a measurement angle of 5 (see illustration 3). Illustration 3: viasis display directed away from the road with a measurement angle = 5° A measurement angle of more than 5 lead to the display of too small speed values and may cause measurement errors outside the specified accuracy. 5.2.1 Leaving traffic The system is adjusted to approaching objects (toward the front side of the board). Leaving objects are also detected but filtered out. Practically also leaving traffic can cause a distance range reduction. Because the object with the highest reflection amplitude, under certain circumstances the leaving traffic can be domi- nant for a short time and therefore „blinding“ the detector, although this detection is filtered out and is not displayed. If necessary the display board can be turned away from the leaving traffic lane within certain limits to get an undisturbed detection, see also chapter 5.2. Page 5 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 5.2.2 Crossing traffic Diagonal crossing traffic passing the radar beam can lead to a disturbing speed value display. By following measures you can reduce the detection distance range of the radar: Decline the viasis housing vertically (see illustration 1) up to 8° towards ground. Reduce the sensitivity of the radar receiver, see also chapter 6.3.7. If both measures show no satisfying results there is nothing to do as to get away from the crossing traffic. 5.3 Viasis MINI text panel During the mounting the fixed text of the viasis MINI is folded in the visible upright position by means of a movable flap board, see illustration 5. If the flap board is open and upright both hinges are fixed with rotatable hooks in this position, see also red arrow in illustration 4. Illustration 5: Open flap board The fixation hook is hanged into the slot Illustration 4: Fixation hook at the hinge and secured by tightening the knurled nut above. The closed flap board is attached to the housing during transport by two hidden magnetic holders. Attention: Don’t forget to tighten the knurled nuts before you transport the viasis MINI. Otherwise they may get loose and lost together with the hooks. Illustration 6: viasis MINI flap board closed Page 6 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 5.4 Electrical preparation Illustration 7: viasis control panel Untighten the knurled nut of the battery attachment, turn the fixation bolt aside and insert the battery into the box. Secure the battery in its position with the turn bolt and by tightening the knurled nut, see also illustration 7 and illustration 8. Warning: Hold the battery always and as long as possible with both hands. Secure the battery immediately after insertion with the turn bolt. Falling down batteries can cause severe injuries. Plug the connector of the battery cable into the socket of the control panel labelled Akku 12VDC, see also illustration 7. The 5 ampere system fuse should already be placed into the fuse holder on the control panel. Press the On/Off toggle switch (labeled 1/0) in position 1 so that the viasis is turned on. Illustration 7 shows the viasis control panel in the open battery box with USB connectors. Only if optional USB interfaces are equipped the green function control LED (USB-Link) can be found, which is lit during the viasis power on initialization time. Directly after power on, during initialization the viasis shows “188” on the numeric LED display for about 3 seconds. Further 3 seconds the bat- tery voltage is shown, for example 13.2 repre- senting a viasis supply voltage of 13.2 Volt. Hereafter the system is ready for operation and the display is empty until the first vehicle is de- Illustration 8: Battery box and control panel tected. Page 7 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Later in cyclic offline measurement mode the green function control LED is lit during the radar measurement, what means typically all 1,5 seconds for 50 to 100 milliseconds. The lead acid accumulator batteries are only partly charged after delivery. Before you start a longer measurement campaign charge the battery to its full capacity. Otherwise the operating time will be reduced. In order to power the system on, the battery voltage level must be above 11,3 Volt. Attention: Wait 5 seconds or more to repower the viasis after you powered it off before. Otherwise malfunctions and error messages of viasis components, which did not reach the off state completely, can be caused. Take care not to press or damage the battery wires, when you close the box cover. The battery box can be protected against unauthorized access with a padlock through the fore- seen holes in battery box body and cover, see illustration 8. The Viasis is configured for permanent operation after delivery (see also chapter 6.3) and is ready for operation. 6 Viasis 3003 software and Data 6.1 Software installation 6.1.1 System requirements for the ViaApp For smartphones and tablets with Android operating system version 4.0 and higher the ViaApp can be installed for the communication with the viasis by the Bluetooth interface. The file viatraffic_app_1_2_3.apk can be found in the folder /Tools/via_app on the delivered CD- ROM. After transfer of the apk file to your smartphone/tablet by Bluetooth/USB or as an email attachment the installation procedure is started in common automatically. After the installation of the ViaApp an update to the newest version is also started automatical- ly in case a connection to the Internet exists. With the ViaApp parameters of the viasis can be set, measurement data can be downloaded and forwarded as an email file attachment. ViaApp was tested with several devices, but due to the large number of devices on the market no right to the proper functioning of ViaApp with each individual system can be granted. A list with smartphone/tablet devices tested by via traffic with the ViaApp can be found in the folder /Tools/via_app on the delivered CD-ROM. 6.1.2 System requirements for viagraph For the successful installation and later operation of the delivered data evaluation program viagraph on your computer following minimum requirements must be fulfilled: Windows XP/Vista/7/8 and 10 in standard installation 280 MB free hard disk space Monitor resolution of minimal 1024 x 768 pixel CD/DVD drive Page 8 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh The software package viagraph is delivered on CD-ROM. For notebooks without CD-ROM/DVD drive you may copy the CD-ROM to an USB flash disk and start the software installation from the USB flash disk hereafter. 6.1.3 Installation and deinstallation of viagraph After insertion of the delivered CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer the installa- tion program is in common started automatically. If the „auto run“ function of your CD-ROM drive is deactivated, start the installation program autostart.exe located on the CD-ROM root folder with the Windows task bar start menu start – execute. With a mouse click select Software in the dialogue page shown in illustra- tion 9. In the following page click on the line viagraph and the installation of the software package is started. The software package viagraph al- lows the evaluation of measurement data of Via devices. Further a com- munication program for the data transfer between the viasis and your computer is an integral part of the software. Illustration 9: Software installation For the first installation you need administrator user rights! During the installation select the option field „Installa- tion for all users“. The later user needs all access rights for the installation folder. Depending on the Windows version the installation of the Microsoft .NET run time module including an appropriate language support is done automatically. For the correct deinstallation click the Windows start button in the task bar and then Start – system control – software, respectively Start –control panel – programs, depending on your Windows version and select viagraph for the deinstallation in the program list. Page 9 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2 Viasis 3003 data connections The viasis 3003 is always equipped with a serial RS232 and a Bluetooth interface. Depending on the viasis variant other interface options vary. It is possible to equip the viasis additionally with USB host interface for computer connections and USB client interface for memory sticks. Further a GSM/GPRS radio modem interface with GPS function can be installed. Attention: At the same time only one data connection shall be active. Oth- erwise an existing connection might be interrupted and the new connection may not work properly. 6.2.1 Data connection with serial cable Connect the delivered RS232 interface cable to a serial RS232 socket of your computer and to the viasis RS232 interface socket on the control panel in the battery box, see also illustration 7. Connect the battery to the viasis and power it by the On/Off switch, if not done already. Start the viagraph program with a mouse double click on the viagraph icon placed on your Windows desktop after installation. After viagraph has started you may choose the preferred program language version from the offered list in the menu Options – Language. In the following dialogue click the on Connect to device, see illustration 10. The empty viagraph main window appears, see illustra- tion 11. Illustration 10: Program selection The program scans all serial interface ports of the computer for known devices and modems. and will choose automatically the first serial port with a connected via device. In case of several connected via devices or modems by different serial interface ports (Bluetooth, USB or GSM) it may happen that viagraph does not select the device or modem to which you wish to connect. In this case please refer to chap- ter 6.2.7. Page 10 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh If the connection is established successfully, the viasis main menu appears in the white terminal input/output area of the viagraph window, see illustration 11. Illustration 11: Viagraph connection window with viasis main menu in the terminal Top left the type of the found viasis system is shown, e. g. viasis, viasis PLUS, viasis PLUS SMILE, etc. Depending on the viasis type and equipment appears one or more buttons below. The buttons Read data and Settings appear always for viasis 3003 systems, the button Matrix is only shown for viasis 3003 PLUS devices. By a click in the input/output terminal area (white background) you may make insertions by your computers keyboard to the viasis menu system directly. Menus, messages and responses from the viasis are displayed then in the terminal area. The more comfortable way to change viasis parameters is to click the Settings button, respectively the Matrix button if you want to change parameters and text pages of a viasis PLUS. In case you connected to a viasis with GSM/SMS/Email function by serial RS232 cable, an Email or SMS transfer may occur while you are connected. The text “Send Email/SMS...” may appear in you terminal window. Please make no insertions further on, respectively do not click any buttons in viagraph until you see the transfer closing message “Email/SMS ok”. More information about viagraph you will find in its online help1 menu Help – Manual. 1 To read the viagraph online manual requires an installed Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 3.0 or higher. You may obtain it from Adobe by the Internet on the website http://www.adobe.com/ Page 11 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.2 Using an USB-RS232 serial adapter Connect the USB-RS232 serial adapter to a free USB port of your computer. Depending on which Windows operating system you use, the presence of the USB-RS232 adapter is recog- nized by Windows as soon the adapter is plugged in. A message like “new hardware detected” is shown and you will be asked to install a driver for the USB device. For the installation of the USB device driver please refer to the instructions of the USB adapt- er package. The adapter package in common includes a CD-ROM with the needed device drivers and installation instructions. If the USB-RS232 interface adapter has been correctly installed as a serial COM port, you may check it in the windows “Device manager”. Unfortunately the way to, respectively the place- ment of the device manager varies with the different Windows operation systems. In the Windows 7 desktop click “„Start – Control Panel – System and Security – Device Manag- er”. Under Windows XP/Vista the “Device manager” is found in the “System properties” register “Hardware”, see illustration 12. Illustration 12: System properties Open the „Device manager“ and expand the line „Ports (COM & LPT). The USB-RS232 adapter must be listed here below. Hint: In case you use several different Illustration 13: Device Manager USB sockets to connect the adapter you may have to reinstall the USB driver. Now connect the USB-RS232 adapter to the viasis with the delivered RS232 cable, connect the battery and proceed as described in chapter 6.2.1. Page 12 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.3 USB host interface connection (optional) If the viasis 3003 is delivered with USB interfaces the USB sockets USB-A (for memory sticks) and USB-B (PC connection) are placed on the control panel, located in the battery box, see also illustration 14. Before you can establish a USB data connection with your com- puter you need to install an USB device driver, see chapters 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.2 and 6.2.3.3. The used driver is a Windows standard interface driver “usbser.sys” for a so called CDC Illustration 14: Control panel with USB sockets (Communication Device Class) device, which also sets up a virtual COM port (a virtual serial interface), which can be used by terminal programs. The USB driver installation should preferably done with administrator user rights. The USB-Link LED is lit continuously as soon you plugged the cable in the viasis USB-B socket and a USB-A socket of your computer. For a proper operation be aware of: - The viasis cannot be supplied by the USB interface, therefore the viasis must by powered e. g. by a charged 12Volt battery for establishing a data connection. - The internal viasis microcontroller has physically only one USB host/client interface, which can be configured either as a host or client USB interface, so either a PC connection can be made or else a USB memory stick shall be plugged in, but both will not work the same time. - During power on initialization (USB-Link LED lit) no USB connec- tion shall exist or shall be established. As soon the viasis completed initialization and the LED begins to flash shortly make a USB connec- tion. - In case the USB connection to your computer is made by means of a USB hub, the data transmission speed can be reduced remarkably. - Always close the data connection before you unplug the cable. In viagraph this is done by closing the main window, e. g. in the terminal program HyperTerminal exists a connect/disconnect button to sepa- rate and close the connection. Otherwise the programs may hang up or do not recognize a reconnected viasis. Page 13 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.3.1 Windows XP and Vista 32 bit USB device driver installation The following installation dialogue is shown here for Windows XP and differs minimal for Windows Vista 32 bit. If the USB cable connection has been made the Windows Found New Hardware Wizard appears automatically. A search on the Windows Update website is time consuming and not needed, so click No, not this time and Next, see picture right aside. Enter the delivered „Via“ CD- ROM in the DVD/CD-ROM drive of your computer. Illustration 15 Choose Install from a list .... and click Next, as shown in illustration 16. In the next window below activate Search for the best driver ... and click the option field Include this location in the search, see illustration 17. Click on the Browse button and search on the CD-ROM drive first the Tools and then the LPC-USB Driver folder. Click the OK button and the driver instal- lation will start. Illustration 16 Illustration 17 Page 14 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh The „...Windows Logo Test...“ mes- sage confirm with a mouse click on the Continue Anyway button. Depending on your Windows user rights, respectively the Windows set- tings regarding device driver installations, the installation may fail. In such a case contact your system administrator, respectively repeat the installation with administrator rights. After a succesful USB driver installation you should also find it in the Windows Device manager (Start – Illustration 18: USB driver installation completed Control Panel – Performance and Maintenance – System – Hardware – Device manager), see illustration 19, in the expanded Ports (COM & LPT) line the LPC USB Vcom Port. The serial USB interface of the viasis can be used now with viagraph or another ter- minal program and a COM port to the viasis 3003 can be opened, see also chap- ter 6.2.1. Illustration 19: Device manager with virtual COM port Page 15 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.3.2 Windows Vista 64, 7, 8, 8.1 USB driver installation In order to avoid long and unnecessary waiting time switch the automatic search for driver on the Windows update server off. The needed driver resp. the driver information cannot be found there. To switch the automatic driver search off open the Devices and Printers window, see illustration 21, either by the Windows Start menu or the Control Panel. Illustration 21: Windows Devices and Printers Click with the right mouse button on the symbol of your computer in Devices and Printers. In the displayed menu selection choose Device installation settings. Illustration 20 Illustration 22 Activate Never install driver software from Windows Update and click on the Save Changes button, see illustration 22 above. After the USB driver installation you may restore the old installation settings in this window. Page 16 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Now connect the powered viasis and your computer with the delivered cable. Plug the USB-B connector in the viasis operator panel USB-B socket, see also illustration 14 and the USB-A connector in your computer socket. The message Device driver ... not ... installed appears. Illustration 23 Open the Device Manager, e. g. with the Windows menu Start – Control Panel – System and Security – System – Device Manager. In the device class Other devices you will see the de- vice USB_CDC0_0. Make a right mouse click to USB_CDC0_0 and select Update driver Software in the displayed menu, see illustration 25. Illustration 24: Driver search Choose Browse my computer for driver software, see illustration 24. Enter the delivered CDROM in your Illustration 25: Driver update CD/DVD drive. In the following dialogue click the Browse button and navigate to the folder \Tools\LPC-USB Driver on the delivered CDROM, see illustration 26. Illustration 26: Driver file folder Illustration 27: Driver verification Page 17 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh In the Windows Security message window click on Install this driver software anyway, see illustration 27. Illustration 28 : Installation completed Click the Close button as soon the message Win- dows successfully updated your driver software is shown, see illustration 28. The device manager will list in Ports (COM&LPT) the USB device driver LPC USB Vcom Port, see illustration 29. By means of the established virtual serial COM port as a device interface viagraph and other terminal Illustration 29: LPC USB Vcom Port software can communicate now with the viasis. 6.2.3.3 USB driver for Windows 10 Under Windows 10 in case a USB CDC (communication device class) system is con- nected the first time the Windows integral standard driver file “usbser.sys” is installed automatically without the need to provide additional driver information files (*.inf) or catalogue files (*.cat). During the USB cable connection between viasis and your computer with a Windows 10 operating system a virtual COM Port Serial USB device (COMn) is visible in the Device Manager in Ports (COM & LPT). Illustration 30: Windows 10 serial USB device Page 18 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.4 USB client interface for USB flash storage sticks (optional) USB flash drives or memory sticks can be plugged in the USB-A socket of the control panel located in the battery box, see also illustration 14. Following points shall be recognized for a trouble free operation: - As long as a USB memory stick is plugged into the viasis control panel no other data connection between the viasis and a computer, particularly no USB host connection shall be established. - The USB interfaces of the control panel fulfills the USB 2.0 specifi- cation. According a USB client interface need to deliver maximal 100 mA for „low power“ mass storage devices. - The USB memory stick shall only be plugged for the time of a data transfer and be removed afterwards. As long as the USB memory stick is plugged in the viasis does operate in measurement mode After connection of a USB memory stick the viasis executes in sequence following tasks: - If not found in the USB stick root directory a folder “VIASIS” is created - Download of stored measurement data in a file (*.VTF) in the “VIASIS” folder. Stored measurement data in the viasis are deleted afterwards. - If a firmware file1 (*.BIN) is found in the “VIASIS” folder it is loaded and a firmware up- date is started. - In case a parameter file (file extension *.PAR) is found in the “VIASIS” folder it is loaded into the viasis and the viasis is reconfigured. - If not already created before a new the log file “USBINFO.TXT” is placed in the “VIASIS” folder. All up- and download actions are logged herein. A text entry example for writing a measurement data file in “USBINFO.TXT” follows: Viasis 3003 - Version 4.12, 15SC4321 Date: 15.09.2015, Time: 14:14:46 Write SC_15SC4321_150915_001.VTF ok Also if the viasis measurement data store is empty a file with the extension *.VTF will be cre- ated. This file includes the current parameter and the event protocol of the viasis. The meaning of the USB-Link LED on the operator panel when using an USB memory stick shows the following table: Green USB-Link LED USB-Stick LED2 Status Permanent lit Permanent lit USB stick is initialized. Diminishes quickly Diminishes quickly Data are transferred, read and written Slowly Blinking, 0,5s on off Remove the USB stick, all actions done and 0,5s off by the viasis 1 viasis microcontroller program software 2 if exists Page 19 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh For the operation of USB memory sticks at your computer in common no customer installed device driver is needed, because they can be operated with already installed Windows standard mass storage device drivers 6.2.4.1 Parameter transfer from and to the viasis using a USB memory stick The viagraph software allows it to modify viasis settings offline and to store the settings in a parameter file on a USB stick. When the USB stick is plugged the next time in the viasis the parameter settings are read and the viasis is reconfigured. With viagraph created parameter files (file ending *.par) are named with the unique serial num- ber of the viasis (e. g. 15SC4321.PAR) and are only loaded by the viasis with the same serial number. So several parameter files can be placed in the “VIASIS” folder of a USB memory stick for several viasis systems. The precondition for the modification of the viasis system parameter settings offline is that the viasis type and version is already known to the viagraph program: Either you connect the viasis directly to your computer and click on the “Settings“ button in viagraph, see also chapters 6.2.1, 6.2.3 and 6.2.5, resp. illustration 10 and illustration 11. Else plug an USB stick into the powered viasis to retrieve a VTF file, see also chapter 6.2.4. Afterwards plug the USB Sticks into an USB port of your computer and „evaluate“ the VTF file with the viagraph software. The actions of first possibility are already described before in the manual. For the second pos- sibility start viagraph by the viagraph button on your desktop. In the viagraph program selection, see also illustration 10, choose Read evaluation file. Plug in the USB stick and open the VTF file in the VIASIS folder of the viasis system, whose set- ting you want to modify later, see illustration 31. The VTF file probably may contains no measure data, therefore you are prompted with a viagraph error message, which you can ignore. Close and reopen viagraph. Illustration 31: Open viasis VTF file to retrieve the settings Page 20 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh In the viagraph start win- dow select the menu Tools and further Parameter set, see illustration 32. From the here given list of pa- rameter files (*.par) select the viasis with the serial number, whose settings you want to modify. The screen with the viasis settings is shown then, with Illustration 32: viasis parameter file selection several tabs depending on the viasis type, see illustration 33. Here you can make the needed parameter changes offline, see also chapter 6.3 following. With the buttons Save and USB-Stick you may save the parameter settings for later use on the computer hard disk drive or the changed parameters directly to the USB stick. Before you click the USB Stick button, select the correct USB Stick Drive letter. If you plug-in the USB stick with the changed parameters at your viasis, the parameter file is au- tomatically read and the viasis reconfig- ured. Illustration 33: viasis settings Only if you selected the parameter file of a viasis PLUS, see illustration 32, appears the check box Matrix in the settings window, see also illustration 33. Is the option Matrix activated you can save text pages and bitmaps (see also chapters 6.10.1 and 6.10.2), which are stored in files on the hard disk, together with the parameter settings in a single parameter file on the USB stick for a further transfer to a viasis PLUS. With the drop down selections Text and Bitmap you can choose the files. Page 21 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.5 Bluetooth modem connection Check whether you computer is equipped with a Bluetooth radio interface ready for operation. If not you may obtain e. g. a USB Bluetooth dongle and install the device driver and operating software delivered by the manufacturer. Depending on the operating system of your computer and the installed Bluetooth interface, either internal or external modem, the way to establish a Bluetooth data connection will vary. Therefore for internal Bluetooth modems please check the online help system of your comput- er and for external Bluetooth modems solution check the installation and operation manual of the manufacturer, delivered with the modem. If standard (generic) Windows Bluetooth interface drivers are used for the Bluetooth modem operation, the initial configuration of the Bluetooth connection is shown for Windows 7 below: - Open Devices and Printers by the Windows Start menu or the Control Panel. In the Devices and Printers window, see also illustration 21, click to Add a device in the menu bar. - The viasis Bluetooth module is ready for operation ex factory and reported e. g. with the device name VIASIS_15SC9991, where 15SC9991 is the 8 character long viasis serial number. - During the connection setup you are Illustration 34: Reported found new device(s) further asked for a pairing code or pin number. Enter here the default in the viasis set four digit pin number 1234. Illustration 36: Pairing code, pin number Illustration 35: Bluetooth device added If the Bluetooth connection is established suc- cessfully the later started viagraph software can find the viasis, otherwise not. Page 22 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh If you use other terminal software or make a manual terminal connection with viagraph you need to know which virtual COM port number was assigned to the Bluetooth device and set the COM port in the terminal program accordingly. This COM port number can be either found in the Windows Device manager, see chap- ters 6.2.2 and 6.2.3.1 or else with a right mouse click to the device, which was added in Devic- es and Printers, menu item Properties in the Services tab, see also illustration 37 below: Illustration 37: COM port number of the serial Bluetooth device The radiation of the Bluetooth antenna and therefore the zone where radio connections are possible is similar to the radar in front of the display. Directly aside, below and behind the viasis a connection is only possible if reflectors (buildings, fences or vehicles) are nearby. Internal Bluetooth modems of laptops, notebooks and mini computers are in common designed for the connection of peripheral Bluetooth devices like key- boards, mouse, mobile phones, which are placed close by your computer. Therefore their radio transmission strength and reception sensitivity is often quite bad. In such a case turn off the internal modem and invest a few Euro for an external class 2 or better class 1 USB Bluetooth dongle, with which you can have a much better and stable distant Bluetooth connection. If you have already established some Bluetooth data connections to different viasis or more generally to via devices in the past and these devices are still reachable while you try to con- nect in viagraph with Connect to device you may experience the fact that viagraph automatically connects to the first found via device and not to the device you wanted viagraph to connect to. In this case you have choose the connection and the device manually, please see chapter 6.2.7. Page 23 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.6 Data connection by GSM radio modem, Email and SMS transfer If you like to transfer data or parameter of the viasis by GSM radio link you need in common to obtain a second GSM radio modem for the communication with your remote computer1. The radio modem must support CSD2 protocol data communica- tion. Further on you need two SIM cards of a provider, whose radio network supports explicitly CSD data transfer with 9600 Baud data transfer speed. For the use of E-mail data transfer and automatic viasis SMS alarm messages you need SIM cards and contracts which include GPRS and SMS services. You may ask if the provider offers contracts with data transfer only (without voice) services for business customers. Before you obtain the SIM cards ask the provider if he covers the needed radio services (CSD, GPRS, SMS) at the viasis measurement place(s) himself. Roaming service, the radio service by a contractor of your radio service provider might be paid with high charges later on. Regarding the questions „How to connect, install driv- ers and setup your radio modem at your computer”, please refer to the information given by the radio mo- dem manufacturer. Finally a virtual COM port must have been created in the Windows Device manager, typical either in the device class COM&LPT or Mo- dems – Properties – Extended, see also chapters 6.2.2 and 6.2.3. Before you can connect with viagraph3 or another minal software, check that the viasis is powered and the radio modem is switched on by its related time ule and (if needed) the PIN number of the SIM card is set in the viasis, refer also to chapters 6.4.2.1 and 6.4.2.2. In order to establish a connection with viagraph click the button Connect to device see illustration 10 in the viagraph start window. After the modem was found the Modem screen is shown, see also illustration 38. Enter the dialing num- ber of the SIM card inserted in the viasis in the field Number. In the Comment field enter a unique descrip- tion for the viasis. Illustration 38: Viagraph radio modem sup- port 1 Laptop or notebook integrated radio modems or “surf sticks” often offer an integrated modem with a virtual COM port for various radio link protocols. But in almost all cases they do not provide CSD protocol capability . Therefore check if CSD explicitly listed in the modem features in the provided manufacturer information. 2 CSD – circuit switched data 3 Viagraph expects a radio modem inserted SIM card with switched off PIN number request. This can be done by inserting the SIM card in a mobile phone. Please follow the mobile phone manual, how to do it. Page 24 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Have you already added the Number entry to the list mark it with a left mouse click and click hereafter on the button Dial number. As soon the GSM data connection is established the viagraph connection window with the viasis main menu in the terminal is shown, see illustration 11. Depending on the viasis type rec- ognized by viagraph several buttons appear on the left side of the viagraph window, see also illustration 39 left aside. As soon the viagraph connection window is closed again the modem connection is also disconnected. Illustration 39: Viagraph connection window and viasis main menu Page 25 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.2.7 Manual selection of the viagraph communication (COM) port The manual selection of the communication (COM) port might be necessary, in case of: - multiple connections to different via devices are possible, but with the Connect to device search only the first found device is automatically connected. - several modems with virtual COM ports are installed at your computer. Viagraph always offers only the first found modem, which is the inappropriate one for a GSM connection to the viasis device. - several Bluetooth connections were established in the past, each with a COM port number, some viasis with Bluetooth modem are in reach, but only the first found device is automatically connected by viagraph. In this cases or a combination of them, please have a look in the Windows Device manager (see chapters 6.2.2 and 6.2.3), particularly in the device classes COM&LPT, Bluetooth devic- es and Modem to find the COM port number of the wished viasis device or modem. Illustration 40: Viagraph terminal connection Start viagraph and select Terminal from the Tools menu, see also illustration 32. The initially empty terminal window appears. In the COM port selection field select the COM port of the wished viasis device or modem. The data transfer rate must be always 115200 Baud. as shown in Illustration 40. Now click the Connect button. As soon you are connected the Disconnect button is shown. Now, you can use the Tools but- ton, to force viagraph to show the defined extended functions for a recognized viasis or radio modem, like Read data, Settings or Dial number, see also illustration 11 and illustration 38. Page 26 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.3 Viasis settings and parameter sets The most often used set- tings can be made after a click on the Settings button in the viagraph connection window (see illustration 11) in the tabs General, Sym- bols and Switches of the Settings window, see illus- tration 41. Following description is based on the direct menu input, which is possible with any ASCII terminal or ter- minal program, or also in viagraph terminal window. As information the input windows of viagraph are shown at the respective menu descriptions. While inputs in the menu Illustration 41: Viagraph settings window system are made directly to the viasis, changes to the actual parameters shown in the viagraph input windows are cached in the program and need to be transferred to the viasis by clicking the Transfer button, otherwise the changes are discarded. Hint: To avoid a malfunction of viagraph take care that the viagraph terminal window shows the viasis main menu before you click to the „Settings“, „Matrix“, etc. button! The viasis 3003 main menu appears after a click to the „Connect to device“ button in viagraph automatically. If you use other terminal software, it depends on the used communication inter- face (RS232, USB, Bluetooth, GSM) whether the main menu appears or not. If the systems are connected and the main menu is not shown, press the „Shift“ and the „H“ key together, so the menu will be send. If you insert one of the selection numbers 1 till 6 in the viasis main menu, displayed in the ter- minal window (see illustration 11) the related sub menu will be send by the viasis. Main menu: 1. Transmit stored data 2. Online measurement 3. Test functions 4. Settings 5. Radio modems 6. Information and time Your choice 1...6? Page 27 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh If you enter 4 for Settings in the main menu the settings menu with the current parameter val- ues is displayed: Settings: 1. Parameter set: 1 2. Time schedule 3. Bidirectional detection: off 4. Speed display options 5. Optimizing display: Balanced 6. Extensions thresholds 7. Radar sensitivity: 100 % 8. Back Your choice 1...8? The parameter values above for the items number 3, 5 and 7 are default settings ex factory. The parameters of the sub menus Speed display options and Extensions thresholds constitute a Parameter set. A Parameter set is valid for the times defined in the Time schedule. Here- with different display parameters can be set for different weekdays or daytimes in a flexible way. The settings for Bidirectional detection, Optimizing display and Radar sensitivity are the same for all parameter sets and times. 6.3.1 Parameter set A parameter set is the collection of all display parameters of the submenus Speed display op- tions and Extensions thresholds and its submenus for the times defined in the submenu Time Schedule. Up to 5 complementary parameter sets for different periods can be used for a variable meas- urement and display behavior. This can be used for example during school hours in order to set a different display behavior in case of a temporary speed restriction, as to the other times of the day off school and weekends, for example at 30 km/h, from Monday till Friday, from 7:30 to 13:30 o’clock only. With the entry 1 in the Settings menu you can change the parameter set shown in the con- cerned submenu Speed display options and Extensions thresholds : Settings: 1. Parameter set: 1 2. Time schedule 3. Bidirectional detection: off 4. Speed display options 5. Optimizing display: Balanced 6. Extensions thresholds 7. Radar sensitivity: 100 % 8. Back Your choice 1...8?1 Page 28 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh In the following command prompt, select the desired, such as the second parameter set: Parameter set=2 If you look in the submenus Speed display options and Extensions thresholds you will find now the values of the 2nd parameter Set. In the submenu Time Schedule you find the valid times and days which are defined for the 2nd parameter Set. If you want to know which parameter set is active in the viasis you need to look into the main menus submenu Information and Time. In the viagraph Settings input window by default only the parameters of parameter set 1 are shown, see illustration 41. Just after the release in the menu Tools – Parameter sets - On, the access to all parameter sets and the combined time schedule Scheduling gets visible, see also illustration 42. Illustration 42: Parameter sets and time schedule Page 29 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.3.2 Time schedule Each parameter set, see chapter 6.3.1, owns a time schedule, which determines during which times the settings of the parameter set are used by the viasis for the measurement, display and possible extensions Time schedule: 1. LED display: on 2. Operation weekdays: Su,Mo,Tu,We,Th,Fr,Sa 3. Daily start time: 00:00 4. Daily stop time: 00:00 5. Back Your choice 1...5? The values of the time schedule shown above are the default values for parameter set 1 ex fac- tory. All weekdays are operation weekdays and the daily operation time is the whole day in case daily start and stop time are set to equal values. So parameter set 1 is valid the whole week for each day. For the other parameter sets is by default no operation day defined, there- fore they are deactivated. In time periods not covered by the time schedules, no measurements and self evident no display opera- tion will happen. The viasis is in a low power energy saving mode, without active radar and the viasis will be “awaked” only at the next valid time schedule time entry. If the operation time of two or more parameter sets overlap, always the parameters of the lowest number parameter set get valid. In viagraph the time schedules of all parameter sets are concentrated in the input windows „Scheduling“, which gets visible by activation of Illustration 43: Time schedule the menus Tools – Parameter sets – on, see illustration 42 and illustration 43. 6.3.2.1 Time schedule – Led display This option permits a hidden measurement and storage of vehicle speeds without a visible out- put on the numeric LED display for the vehicle driver. This function can be also realized if the minimal and the maximal displayed speed parameters are set to equal values, see also 6.3.4.2. Page 30 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Enter 1 in the Time schedule menu and the following menu choice is offered: LED display: 1. off 2. on Your choice 1...2? 6.3.2.2 Time schedule – Operation weekdays In the submenu Operation weekdays the days are chosen, at which measurements shall be done and depending to other settings of the parameter set the speed shall be shown on the numeric LED speed display or other actions defined in the Extensions thresholds shall be made. The menu Time schedule (chapter 6.3.2) lists the current operation weekdays, e. g. Su, Mo, Tu, We, Th, Fr, Sa of the parameter set. After selecting 2 in the menu Time schedule you are asked to select the day you want to change in the submenu Weekday : Weekday: 1. Sunday 2. Monday 3. Tuesday 4. Wednesday 5. Thursday 6. Friday 7. Saturday Your choice 1...7? _ The chosen day of the week is added to the list of operation days in the Time schedule menu, if it was not listed before, respectively removed from the list, if it was listed. 6.3.2.3 Time schedule – Daily start and daily stop time The daily start and stop time determine the daily time of the measurement and display opera- tion at the chosen operation weekdays (chapter 6.3.2.2). If the Daily start time and the Daily stop time is set to the same time values, these times are ignored by the system and the task is performed at the whole selected operation weekdays. You have to insert the time values in the format hh:mm. Valid are time values between 00:00 and 23:59. Examples: 1. You intend to measure in front of a school only during school visiting times. Only at schooldays from Monday till Friday, in the time from 07:30 till 13:30 the viasis shall measure and display the vehicle driver’s speed. Following settings must be made in parameter set 1 in the time schedule menu: - Set LED display to „on“. - Change the operation weekdays to „Mo,Tu,We,Th,Fr“. - Set the daily start time to „07:30“ and the daily stop time to „13:30“ Page 31 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh - If set, the operation weekdays of the other parameter sets must be discarded. 2. You want to measure at a road construction site by night from 19:00 till 06:00 display the vehicle driver’s speed. But you want to measure the whole day around the clock. Following settings must be made in parameter set 1 in the time schedule menu: - Set LED display to „on“. - Change the operation weekdays to „ Su,Mo,Tu,We,Th,Fr,Sa “. - Set the daily start time to „19:00“ and the daily stop time to „06:00“ Additionally following settings need to be done in parameter set 2 in the time schedule menu: - Set LED display to „off“. - Change the operation weekdays to „ Su,Mo,Tu,We,Th,Fr,Sa “. - Set the daily start time to „6:00“and the daily stop time to „19:00“ In the second example with the time schedule of parameter set 1 a measurement with numeric speed display is made from 19:00 till 6:00 o’clock each night. During the daytime from 06:00 till 19:00 o’clock the time schedule of parameter set 2 measures without displaying the speed on the numeric LED display. 6.3.3 Bidirectional detection The viasis radar detects also the data of leaving vehicles, whose data by default are not stored in memory and whose speed in principle are not shown on the numeric LED display. The fea- ture Bidirectional detection allows an additional memorization of data of leaving vehicles for later data evaluation purposes. If you enter 3 in the „Settings” menu you are prompted to change the Bidirectional detection state: Bidirectional detection 1. off 2. on Your choice 1...2? Is the Bidirectional detection set to “on” you are given in the Online measurement menu the speed data of vehicles of both driving directions by the serial data connection(s), see chapter 6.6. Hint: The bidirectional detection delivers only at low traffic density, respectively low vehicle meeting rate, complete and meaningful data for the leaving vehicle traffic, whose vehicles cannot be detected as long they are in the radar shadow of approach- ing vehicles. The setting for the Bidirectional detection is valid for all parameter sets. In viagraph the fea- ture Both directions can be activated in the Tools menu of the Settings window. Page 32 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.3.4 Menu Speed display options The menu Speed display options is shown if you choose 4 in the Settings menu: Speed display options: 1. Decimal places: off 2. Minimal speed displayed: 5 km/h 3. Maximal speed displayed: 199 km/h 4. Threshold blinking LED: 200 km/h 5. Threshold Led mixed color: 200 km/h 6. Threshold LED color change: 200 km/h 7. Back Your choice 1...7? The parameter values shown above are the default values ex factory. For viasis LED displays with only one LED color the options Threshold LED mixed color and Threshold LED color change do not exist. The Threshold LED mixed color is only shown for viasis with two appropriate LED colors. The options given in menu “Speed display options”, with exception of the Decimal places, need to be defined for each activated parame- ter set. 6.3.4.1 Decimal places For applications where low vehicle speeds shall be measured exactly, e. g. for drive in weigh- bridges, the display of a decimal digit until 19,9 km/h (or mph) can be activated by entering 1 in the Speed display options menu and further activating the decimal: Decimal places 1. off 2. on Your choice 1...2? If vehicle speeds above or equal 20 km/h are measured the speed values are displayed on the numeric LED display as whole numbers again. If the speed decimal is activated the speed data output in the Online measurement (chapter 6.6) mode, is also given with a decimal digit. The setting for decimal places is a general setting equal for all parameter sets. 6.3.4.2 Minimal - and maximal speed displayed The „Minimal speed displayed“ is the lowest measured speed value published on the numeric LED speed display In the “Settings” menu you are prompted after the selection 4: Minimal speed displayed = _ End the numbers input with <return >. The new value is shown in the menu immediately. The values for minimum speed can be set in the range between 5 and 199 km/h. Only values lower or equal the adjusted maximum speed will be accepted by the system. Page 33 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh You may raise the minimal speed factory setting of 5 km/h to e.g. 15 km/h to suppress slow movements of vehicles, pedestrians or wind moved branches of trees, which may also initiate measurements on short distance. The „Maximal speed displayed“ is the highest measured speed value shown on the numeric LED speed display. With the 2 ½ - digit LED display you may set the value between adjusted minimal speed and a maximum of 199 km/h. The reduction of the Maximal speed displayed to values just above a local speed limit (maybe plus 20%) avoid the driver testing of the maximal shown speed or „tachometer checks“. The setting of the Maximal speed displayed parameter is analogue the setting of the Minimal speed displayed. The setting can be changed by the selection 5 in the Settings menu. Both settings have no influence on the speed data storage and the output of serial data. All speeds measured between 5 km/h and 199 km/h are stored, respectively transferred to a con- nected computer terminal. Hint: By setting minimal and maximal speed displayed to equal values e. g. to 5 km/h, the vehicle speed data are memorized, resp. transferred to a connected termi- nal, without an output on the numeric LED display for the vehicle drivers, see also chapter 6.3.2.1. 6.3.4.3 Threshold blinking LED Depending on the excess of the „Threshold blinking LED“ by the measured vehicle speed, the numeric speed display is alternated for 0.25 seconds on and 0.25 seconds off time. In a display update cycle with 1.5 seconds length the numeric speed „blinks“ up 3 times in short sequence. This function can be used to reduce the power consumption of the system, with the effect of nearly doubling the system operating time without battery recharge. Hereby the threshold value is set to the minimum speed. If the threshold is set to a local speed limit, this function can be used to point over speeding drivers to their misbehavior, with the effect of a blinking (warning) display when the speed limit is exceeded. The threshold is set like the other thresholds in the range from 5 km/h till 200 km/h (blinking deactivated). 6.3.4.4 Threshold LED mixed color (Option) If the viasis is equipped with two LED colors, which can be shown at the same time and emit seemingly a third color, the parameter “Threshold LED mixed color” is shown. Practically if the viasis has e. g. green and red LED the result of displaying both colors is the mixture color yellow, which is displayed if a measured vehicle speed exceeds the related, set threshold. The speed threshold parameter is set similar to the speed threshold LED color change, see also chapter 6.3.4.5. For example if the viasis is equipped with yellow and red emitting LED the color sequence of the display yellow – orange – red would be chosen with rising measured speed values, the mixed LED color threshold (orange display) would be set to 31 km/h and the threshold LED color change to 41 km/h. Is the LED mixed color threshold set to a higher value than the LED color change threshold it will have no visible effect on the display. Page 34 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.3.4.5 Threshold LED color change The viasis is supplied in several versions, with a numeric LED display with one or two LED colors. Only the two color versions have a menu item for changing the LED display color de- pendent of the measured vehicle speed. The color of the numeric speed display changes, for example from yellow to red color, if a detected vehicle moves faster than the set “Threshold LED color change” speed limit. Also this option can be used to indicate the vehicle drivers that they drive too fast and their vehicle speed exceeds the local speed limit. The threshold is set like the other thresholds in the range from 5 km/h till 200 km/h (numeric speed display color change deactivated). 6.3.5 Optimizing display The viasis is equipped with a sensor for the environment brightness. With the measured values the needed brightness of the display LEDs for a good visibility is calculated and controlled. With the menu Optimizing display the LED display brightness can be influenced if needed: Optimizing display 1. Operating time 2. Balanced 3. Visibility Your choice 1...3? If the option Operating time is chosen the display appears darker and reaches maximal 50% of the possible brightness adjusted ex factory. If you choose Visibility the LED display appears to be brighter in compare to the Balanced setting. Here the viasis reaches the adjusted maximal brightness earlier and needs up to 50% more battery energy with the consequence of having a reduced operating time with battery supply. 6.3.6 Menu extensions thresholds The viasis can be equipped with several optional extensions, which can be divided in two groups. One group are the LED display extensions in form of LED warning symbols, which are inte- grated in the numeric LED speed display field, which are shown alternating to the numeric speed values, see chapter 6.3.6.1. The other group consists of controlled switches as relays or power MOSFET transistors switches or switched optical output units, like LED warning lamps, LED matrices with text or symbols, which are activated additionally to the numeric LED speed display at the same time, see also chapter 6.3.6.2 foll. All switches or output units are activated by the excess of a set speed threshold by the measured vehicle speed. More precisely an “on and an off speed threshold can be set for each symbol, switch or peripheral device. Page 35 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh The following „Extensions thresholds“ menu is an example. Number and sequence of the submenus depend on the installed viasis equipment: Extensions thresholds: 1. Led symbols 30,50,60 2. Led symbols 70,80,! 3. Led symbols smileys 4. Led warning light 5. Relays 6. Display pages 7. Definition of symbols 8. Back Your choice 1...8? The first three menus Led symbols... are predefined by default. These symbol menus and their contenting symbol definitions can be changed, however not the number of symbols in the men- us, see chapter 6.3.6.2. 6.3.6.1 Thresholds LED circle symbols The viasis is delivered with integrated signs, red LED circle symbols with white speed limit (di- ameter 300 mm). The related speed thresholds for the activation and deactivation are placed in the Settings - Thresholds Extensions menu. The display of speed limit or warning symbols alternates with the numeric speed display. The display is changed each ¾ second (750 ms). If you select LED symbols 30, 50, 60 in the Thresholds Extensions menu the following submenu for the related speed thresholds is shown: Led symbols 30,50,60: 1. Symbol 30 on: 31 km/h 2. Symbol 30 off: 50 km/h Illustration 44: Circle symbol 50 3. Symbol 50 on: 200 km/h 4. Symbol 50 off: 200 km/h 5. Symbol 60 on: 200 km/h 6. Symbol 60 off: 200 km/h 7. Back Your choice 1...7? For each symbol an „on“ and „off“ speed threshold can be set between 5 km/h and 200 km/h (threshold inactive). Is the measured speed below the “on” or above the „off“ threshold only the numeric speed is displayed. In the menu example above the speed limit 30 symbol is shown at measured speeds from 31 km/h till 49 km/h alternating to the numeric speed. Page 36 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh In viagraph the speed thresholds of the circular warning symbols are set in the Symbols tab for the selected parameter set, see illustration 45 below: Illustration 45: Viagraph symbol tab 6.3.6.2 Definition of symbols The predefined symbols in the first three menus of the Thresholds Extensions menu, see chap- ter 6.3.6, can be changed, however not the number of symbols in the menus. For example if you need the circle symbols 8, 25 and 50 instead of the symbol group 30, 50 and 60, you may enter 7 in the Thresholds Extensions menu and the symbol group you want to change is requested: Select symbol group 1. 30, 50, 60 2. 70,80,! 3. Smiley Your choice 1...3?1 Choose with 1 the symbol group 30, 50, 60 and enter a new name for the symbol group (max. 31 characters long): New symbol group name = 8,25,50 < Return > Page 37 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Now each new symbol name (max. 11 characters) with a related font number, see also table 1, must be inserted: Symbol name: 8 < Return > Font: 408 < Return > Symbol name: 25 < Return > Font: 425 < Return > Symbol name: 50 < Return > Font: 450 < Return > On the two digit 7 segment number display in the circle all numbers between 1 ... 99 can be shown. For the font number you must add 400 to the number, which shall be displayed. What means to display 25 in the circle you must enter 25 + 400 = 425 for the font number. Besides the numbers in the circle there are four further circle symbols with font number 500 to 503 defined, see following table 1: Font 401 .... 499 500 501 502 503 Symbol Example 425 Table 1: Font numbers of the circle symbols In the later menu presentation the text “Led symbols” is automatically inserted ahead and in front of each symbol name the text “Symbol” within the new menu. After insertion the menu Extensions Thresholds is repeated by the viasis with the new menu items: Thresholds Extensions: 1. Led symbols 8,25,50 2. Led symbols 70,80,! 3. Led symbols smileys 4..... 6.3.6.3 LED Warning lights (Option) If the viasis is delivered with one or more LED warning flash lights in the menu Thresholds Extensions a related submenu Warning light or similar will appear: LED warning light 1. Yellow LED on: 200 km/h 2. Yellow LED off: 200 km/h 3. Red LED on: 200 km/h 4. Red LED off: 200 km/h 5. Back Your choice 1...5? Page 38 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Depending on the warning light features (uni-/bi- or tricolor) the items of the menu will vary. The LED of the warning light are switched on or off synchronously to the numeric speed dis- play in case the related on/off threshold is exceeded by the measured speed value. The speed threshold for the activation/deactivation of the LED color(s) of the warning light can be set between 5 km/h and 200 km/h (threshold deactivated). 6.3.6.4 Relays and power MOSFET transistors (optional) The viasis 3003 can be ordered with up to 7 galvanic isolated low voltage relays, appropriate for switching up to 230 V mains voltage or alternatively with up to 7 high current MOSFET power transistor to switch 12VDC loads, technical data see chapters 10.3.5. The connection is made either in an external waterproof (IP65) connection box with number labeled screw clamps or the viasis is delivered a connection cable (and scheme) ex factory. For three installed relays the menu for their related speed thresholds in the menu Extensions Thresholds – Relays will look similar to the following menu: Relays 1. Relay 1 on: 31 km/h 2. Relay 1 off: 51 km/h 3. Relay 2 on: 51 km/h 4. Relay 2 off: 61 km/h 5. Relay 3 on: 61 km/h 6. Relay 3 off: 81 km/h 7. Back Your choice 1...7? The relays or MOSFET transistors are switched synchronous to the numeric speed display in case the related speed thresholds are exceeded by the measured vehicle speed. In the menu example above relays 1 is switched for measured speeds from 31 km/h till 50 km/h. 6.3.6.5 LED display pages or additional LED fixed text (viasis PLUS or PLUS SMILE) The submenu Display pages is placed in the menu Extensions Thresholds in case the viasis is equipped with additional LED fixed text or symbols (variant viasis PLUS SMILE) or a LED full matrix (variant viasis PLUS) below the numeric speed display for the display of additional text or symbols. For an additional board with three fixed texts the related menu may look as follows: Display pages: 1. THANK YOU on: 5 km/h 2. THANK YOU off: 31 km/h 3. SLOW DOWN on: 31 km/h 4. SLOW DOWN off: 41 km/h 5. Sad face :-( on: 41 km/h 6. Sad face :-( off: 200 km/h 7. Back Your choice 1...7? Page 39 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh For LED fixed texts (PLUS SMILE) the displayed text or a symbol name will be used to label the menu items, for LED full matrices with variable texts and symbols the menu items are la- beled only as numbered LED page (1, 2, ... etc.). For each text or symbol can be defined an „On“ and „Off“ threshold between 5 km/h and 200 km/h (threshold deactivated). The text or the symbol is switched synchronous to the numeric speed display if the related threshold is exceeded by the measured speed value. Moreover the switched outputs (relays, ..., display pages) are also activated outside the range of the set minimal and maximal speed dis- played thresholds for the numeric speed display, so that for example with the viasis PLUS additional text like “Slow down” can be also shown without having a numeric speed displayed. For viasis PLUS SMILE with LED fixed text the activation range of two or more texts shall not overlap. The simultaneous display of two fixed texts will cause an unreadable result. The viasis PLUS shows in case of the simultaneous activation of two or more LED pages, the pages in an alternating sequence each for the time of measurement cycle (typ. 1,5 s). This fea- ture can be used e. g. in bi-lingual regions to show additional text in two languages in an alternating manner. For example Led page 1 shows the text „THANK YOU“, Led Page 2 shows the welsh text „DIOLCH YN FAWR“, the „On“ threshold for both pages is set to 5 km/h and the „Off“ threshold to 30 km/h – as result for the time of detection of a 28 km/h driv- ing vehicle the texts „THANK YOU“ and „DIOLCH YN FAWR“ are shown alternating each for 1,5 seconds. In viagraph switched out- puts are placed in the tab Switches of the parameter sets, see illustration 46. The viagraph settings Switch- es tab example represents a viasis PLUS with 4 Led pag- es, three relays and a bicolor LED warning flash light (yel- low/red LED). Illustration 46: Viagraph settings tab switches Page 40 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.3.7 Radar sensitivity With the menu item Radar sensitivity the gain of the analogue receiver amplifier, preset to a gain of 100%, can be reduced in steps of 20%. In consequence the detection distance range of the viasis will be reduced. This feature can be used to avoid or at least reduce the detection of diagonal moving traffic of a crossing in front of the viasis, see also chapter 5.2.2. The radar sensitivity can be set to the values 100, 80, 60, 40 and 20 per cent, other values are rejected. 6.4 Radio modems Which optional radio modems are installed and found during power on initialization can be seen in the information header of the menu „Information and Time”, see chapter 6.5. The content of the menu Radio modems varies depending on installed radio interfaces: Radio modems: 1. Bluetooth modem 2. GSM/GPRS modem 3. GPS module 4. Back Your choice 1...4? If the submenu of a not installed radio modem is called only the hint „Not installed!“ is shown. For the menus Radio modems and Information and time exists (yet) no input screen in the viagraph program. 6.4.1 Bluetooth modem If you select „1. Bluetooth modem“ in the radio modems menu the Bluetooth menu is shown: Bluetooth menu 1. Device name 2. Pin number 3. Information 4. Back Your choice 1...4? With the choice of 3. Information the current settings of the viasis Bluetooth modem are de- rived, which will look ex factory similar to the following: Laird Bluetooth Data Module 730-SA Version 11.28.0 Bluetooth address = 0016A40D81AE Device name = "VIASIS_15SC9991" Trusted device list: 001583501455 001167559110 001A7DDA710D Clear list (y/n)? Page 41 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh The Bluetooth address, is a unique and user unchangeable hardware address provided by the Bluetooth modem manufacturer. The device name is the chosen name for the viasis Bluetooth devices shown if you search for connectable devices under Windows on your computer. The Trusted device list are the Bluetooth hardware addresses of computers to which the viasis was once successfully connected. The Trusted device list might have to be cleared : - if more than 20 Bluetooth addresses are already shown in the list. Herewith the list is full and the Bluetooth interface in the viasis will not accept connections to new computers with new Bluetooth addresses. - if the pin number or the device name of a trusted device was changed Hint: Access to the menu Bluetooth modem is either only possible via USB or a RS232 serial cable connection. If you try to make an illegal access e.g. by Bluetooth or GSM connection the hint Access impossible! will be displayed on a connected terminal. 6.4.1.1 Bluetooth device name The so called local device name can be changed and is set by default to „VIASIS-15SC9991“, wherein “15SC9991” is the unique viasis serial number. After you selected 1. Device name in the Bluetooth menu you are asked to enter the new device name: Device name = MyBluetooth001 The character string is to be ended by pressing the <Return> key. The device name may consist of 1 till 40 characters. Avoid special characters, apostrophes and similar, because they are in common interpreted by connection software and this often in a different way. 6.4.1.2 Pin number If you choose 2 for the Pin number in the Bluetooth modem menu you are asked to enter a new pin number: Pin number=8241 The pin number itself can be changed, the length of the pin number can be up to 8 digits. All numbers from 1 till 99999999 are valid pin numbers. If a not correct pin number is send by a connecting computer the connection is refused by the viasis, therefore the number protects the viasis from unwished access. Page 42 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.4.2 GSM/GPRS Modem The GSM/Email menu is shown if you enter 2 in the Radio modem menu (see also chapter 6.4): GSM/Email menu: 1. Time schedule 2. Pin number 3. Configure GPRS 4. Configure SMTP-Server 5. Configure EMAIL 6. Configure SMS 7. Back Your choice 1...7? The following chapters describe each menu item. 6.4.2.1 GSM/Email time schedule After the entry 1 at the GSM/Email menu prompt the Time schedule menu with the currently defined time schedule settings is send. The following example shows the ex factory settings after delivery: Time schedule GSM/Email 1. Operation weekdays: Mo,Tu,We,Th,Fr 2. Daily start time: 08:00 3. Daily stop time: 18:00 4. Email delivery: None 5. Back Your choice 1...5? The setting of the GSM Operation weekdays and the Daily start/stop time is done similar as the settings made in the time schedule for measurement and LED display, please refer to the chapters 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3. The menu items Operation weekdays and Daily start/stop time define only the days and the time span during which the viasis GSM/GPRS modem remains powered and can be called by a dial up GSM connection. The delivery of Email and SMS messages and data works independently from the herewith defined time schedule and are also send outside the here defined days and times. To reduce the available times, where the viasis radio modem can be called, means to extend the operating time of battery supplied viasis systems remarkably. This due to the fact that the basic power consumption while measuring without active LED display is four times higher if the GSM/GPRS modem is powered. A 24 hour availability of a radio connection to the viasis is in common not needed, because reconfigurations are necessary quite seldom, most often during workdays and only in the common working times (08:00 till 18:00). For an individual time setting and a possible further reduction of the power consumption you can use the described menu items. During an active GSM connection the modem is not powered off. The modem is switched off as soon as the connection is closed hereafter. Page 43 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Before you configure the Email delivery, please set the PIN number first in case the SIM card is already inserted, see also next chapter. The submenu Email delivery offers different possibilities to initiate the sending of measure- ment data E-mails: Email delivery: 1. None 2. Memory full 3. Daily 4. Weekly 5. Monthly Your choice 1...5? The selection Memory full sends a mail with the measurement data as a file attachment if more than 95% of the data flash storage of the viasis is full. Further you can choose the time intervals Daily, Weekly or Monthly. If you select them addi- tional menu options for the delivery time and possibly the date appear in the menu. For this options always a mail is send also if no measurements were stored in the selected time interval. If you select Daily mail delivery you need to define the daily delivery time: 4. Email delivery: Daily 5. Time: 03:00 The time value is set in the format “hh:mm”, with time values between 00:00 and 23:59. For the mail delivery interval Weekly additionally the day of the week, where the mails shall be send must be set: 4. Email delivery: Weekly 5. Time: 03:00 6. Weekday: Wednesday If you enter “6” for the Weekday selection a sub menu is shown, which lists all weekdays for your choice. If the mail delivery is set to Monthly the day of the month need to be given instead: 4. Email delivery: Monthly 5. Time: 03:00 6. Day of month: 1 Legal month values are 1 to 28 only in order to avoid delivery gaps in the short months of the year, e. g. in February. Further hints: Use delivery (night) times with low traffic density and low GPRS data transfer volumes. During the time the mail needs to be delivered no vehicle data can be measured and stored. The minimal delivery time for e. g. an 4 MB data long mail is ~12 minutes. The GPRS upload bandwidth must be shared with other devices uploading data to a radio base station. Page 44 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Whether an E-Mail or SMS must be delivered is checked once per minute by the viasis. If a delivery cannot be done due to an active Bluetooth, USB or GSM data connection, the transfer its started within a minute after the closure of the connection. Is a viasis powered off during the scheduled time of delivery, the E-mail will not be sent after the next power on anymore. An E-mail delivery is valued valid as soon as the mail server (SMTP-server) acknowledges the data reception and the server connection is closed regularly. In this case the stored and transferred measurement data are erased in the flash memory automatically. Otherwise the E- mail delivery is repeated within a minute after the failure and until the transfer is successful. Be aware if you use the daily interval a lot of small data files is created, which must be merged later on to be able to create e. g. a week long evaluation. 6.4.2.2 SIM card PIN code The input of the PIN1 code or the request of its set status can only be done by a serial RS232 cable connection. Access by the GSM, Bluetooth or USB data connections is refused with the message “No access possible”. Select the GSM/E-mail menu item “2. Pin number” to enter the 4 digit PIN code delivered from the service provider together with the SIM card, for example: Pin number=1234 <Return> 2 In case the SIM card is already inserted in the push/pull SIM card holder located at the con- trol panel backside in the battery box you should receive following answer: +CPIN: READY OK In case of an error or problem you get one of the messages listed in the table below: + CME ERROR: SIM not inserted SIM card not in the SIM card holder, not readable or defective + CME ERROR: incorrect password Entered PIN code is wrong ERROR / ERROR SIM PIN PIN code wrong or already inserted +CPIN: SIM PIN PIN code required +CPIN: SIM PUK3 PIN code setting failed 3 times, SIM card is locked. You can unlock the SIM card exter- nally only, e. g. by inserting the SIM card in a mobile phone and insertion of the 8 digit long PUK code 4. If you enter <Return> only at the PIN code prompt the status of the PIN setting is delivered without a setting and one of the status messages above are output. Repeated insertion of the already set correct PIN code is illegal. 1 PIN – „Personal Identification Number“ - 4 digit long numeric pass code 2 SIM – “Subscriber Identity Module” – Component for radio network user identification 3 PUK – „Personal Unlock Code” – 8 digit long unlock code to be found in SIM card accompanying information of your GSM/GPRS service provider. 4 Guidance for the procedure is in common documented in the manual of your mobile phone Page 45 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh In case the PIN code request of the SIM card was already switched off or you change later to a SIM card with switched off PIN request you need to delete an earlier entered and stored PIN code by insertion of PIN number = 0 <Return>. For the protection against misuse and theft the inserted PIN code cannot be requested Attention: Never change the PIN code arbitrarily. The PIN code is send from the viasis to the radio modem after each modem power on automatically. After 3 failing attempts the SIM card is locked and the PUK code is requested further on. In case the inserted PIN code is rejected check your provider infor- mation first before you retry it again. 6.4.2.3 GPRS configuration If you select “3. Configure GPRS” in the GSM/Email menu you will receive the current GPRS configuration. The following example shows the configuration ex factory: APN: not set USER: not set PASS: not set ROAMING: off Change (y/n)? In case you answer the question “Change(y/n)?” with “y” for yes, the APN (access point net- work), the related USER username and PASS pass code will be requested sequentially by the viasis. Valid entries are up to 31 alphanumeric characters, but without question mark, colon and double point. The text string must be ended with <Return>. Entering <Return> only will skip the request and the setting remains unchanged. Thereafter you can allow or deny roaming connections, what means connections made instead of your service provider by another provider, which will bill the connections separately to your provider. This is in common accompanied by much higher connection charges. You may configure GPRS access by all viasis serial interfaces (RS232, GSM, Bluetooth and USB). But only by using the RS232 connection the configuration is immediately tested and the protocol is send to a connected terminal: Configure ... AT+CGATT=0 AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet.t-mobile" AT+QICSGP=1,"internet.t-mobile","tm","tm" AT+CGATT=1 AT+QIMODE=1 AT+QIREGAPP AT+QIACT AT+QILOCIP +IP: 100.76.160.156 GPRS ok In case of a problem or an error while establishing the GPRS connection the sequence above ends with „Error GPRS“. If you configure by other interfaces as RS232 connection a direct Page 46 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh test cannot be done and for a possibly occurred error you need to check the viasis protocol (see chapter 6.5.1) to find errors of the GPRS connection establishment like “Error GSM/GPRS”, “Error GPRS timeout”, “Error GPRS communication”.... The following table lists the GPRS access data of some European provider companies (without warranty): Provider / Country APN USER PASS T-mobile Germany internet.t-mobile tm tm Vodafone Germany web.vodafone.de [any] [any] O2 Germany internet [not set] [not set] E-Plus Germany internet.eplus.de eplus gprs Mobilkom A1 Austria a1.net [email protected] [not set] Connect Austria Austria web.one.at [user specific] [user specific] tele.ring Austria web [email protected] web LUXGSM Luxemburg Web.pt.lu [not set] [not set] Swisscom Switzerland gprs.swisscom.ch [not set] [not set] Orange Switzerland internet [not set] [not set] Sunrise Switzerland internet internet internet Request the GPRS access data if not known from your SIM card (and ser- vice) provider. You can delete an already made configuration entry by entering <Blank> and <Return> hereafter. If you contact our technical support in case of problems, please provide the output protocol (text download or terminal snapshot) of the GPRS configuration send during RS232 connec- tions. 6.4.2.4 Configuring the SMTP-Server (Mail server) For the configuration of the mail server enter “4” in the GSM/Email menu and you will receive the actual settings for the E-mail delivery to the SMTP1-Server: SMTP-SERVER: smtp.viaxmail.de SMTP-PORT: 25 EHOST: viaxmail.de EUSER: [email protected] EPASS: **** MAILFROM: [email protected] Change (y/n)? The shown settings are the default settings ex factory and are valid data if you intend to use our mail server for the E-mail delivery. The viasis connects the SMTP server only for the for- 1 SMTP – simple mail transfer protocol Page 47 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh warding transport of the viasis E-mail to the final destination mail server of the recipient E-mail account(s), which you have to enter in “5. Configure Email” (see next chapter) of the GSM/Email menu. Note: The use of our SMTP-server takes place on own danger and under exclusion of any liability on the part of the via traffic controlling GmbH. If you answer “y” to the question “Change (y/n)?” you will be prompted for each SMTP- server setup entry. For valid inputs in the text fields see the insertion of APN, USER and PASS in the previous chapter. The input fields in detail: SMTP-Server – URL1 name of a mail server which is ready to receive E-mails delivered by the viasis. The mail server only forwards (relays) emails to the recipient(s). Alternatively to the URL name the IP address (e. g. 192.86.102.245) of a SMTP server can also be inserted. SMTP-Port – Up to 5 digit long port number (1...65535), at which the mail server listens to mail delivery attempts. Typically mail servers listen at port 25, but this may differ for single SMTP servers. EHOST – Host name of the E-mail sender EUSER – Senders user name of its E-mail account at the mail server. In common the E-mail sender owns a user mail account at the providers mail server. Nowadays rarely exist also open mail (relay) server forwarding each mail they get from whoever, with no authorized login needed or allowed. If you use such an open relay server delete user name EUSER and pass- word EPASS. EPASS – Password of the above described user E-mail account. For the authentication of the mail sender needed password for the login as user at the mail server. For open relay server the password shall be deleted, see above. In order to avoid misuse by unauthorized third persons the set EPASS password is output as a “******” string only. MAILFROM – E-mail address of the mail sender A configuration change of the SMTP-server access data can be done by all serial interface con- nections (RS232, GSM, Bluetooth or USB) of the viasis. But only if you are connected by RS232 directly the access to the SMTP-Server and if he is ready to receive E-mails from the viasis is tested and a protocol send to a connected terminal (example): Configure ... AT+QILOCIP +IP: 100.69.8.51 AT+QIDNSIP=1 AT+QIOPEN="TCP","smtp.viaxmail.de",25 CONNECT 220 mx01.viaxmail.de ESMTP Postfix EHLO viaxmail.de 250-mx01.viaxmail.de AUTH LOGIN 334 VXNlcm5hbWU6 1 URL – “Uniform Resource Locator” – unique resource name, simplified e. g. the name of a website or host in the internet. URL names are translated by DNS (domain name system) servers in routable IP addresses. Page 48 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 334 UGFzc3dvcmQ6 235 2.7.0 Authentication successful MAIL FROM: <[email protected]> 250 2.1.0 OK QUIT 221 2.0.0 OK SMTP-Server ok If the connection between viasis and SMTP-server could be established and the server declared ready to receive E-mails from the viasis you will finally see the message “SMTP-Server ok” otherwise “Error SMTP-Server”. If you enter <Return> only, the text entry is skipped and the text field con- tent remains unchanged. To delete the content of a text field to the state “not set” enter <Blank> fol- lowed by <Return>. Be aware that mail servers have often limits concerning the maximal length of E-mails. Most mail servers limits are above 10 Megabyte (= limit of our providers mail server) but in some known cases also below. A viasis with 8 MB flash storage installed is capable of producing 12 MB long E-mails in case the storage is full. The reason is the 30% increase in data volume due to the needed base64 coding of the binary measurement file attachment. Ask the mail server provider about existing limits before you start to send E-mails. In case you need to contact our technical support, please provide the protocol of the failed SMTP-server configuration, which is essential to analyze the problem. 6.4.2.5 E-mail configuration With the GSM/Email menu item “Configure Email” you can define the recipient(s) email ad- dress and whether E-mail alarm messages are send or not. First the actual configuration is send (example): MAILTO: [email protected] MAILCOPY: not set Email alarm: on Change (y/n)? Differing from the example no E-mail address is set by default and the E-mail alarm is switched off. To change the setting enter “y” to the “Change(y/n)?” prompt. Valid input for the sequen- tially asked text fields MAILTO and MAILCOPY are maximal 31 alphanumeric character long E-mail addresses. Excluded characters are question mark, colon and double point. Further is valid things said about the text field input of the previous two chapters. MAILTO for the recipient of the E-mail and MAILCOPY for the recipient of an Email copy shall contain only a single E-mail address, no lists are allowed. With activated E-mail alarm the viasis will send E-mails for the events of “Measurement stor- age > 95% full”, “Battery voltage < 11,5V” and for system errors. The system error emails include up to the last 8 viasis protocol entries, see also chapter 6.5.1. The E-mails are send latest after the minute of the occurrence of the event or failure. Page 49 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh If you respond ‘y’ to both questions “Change(y/n)?” and “Send email(y/n)?”, a test E-mail is send and if you a connected locally by RS232 (only), you will see the delivery protocol of the send E-mail: Send Email... AT+QILOCIP +IP: 100.66.122.19 AT+QIDNSIP=1 AT+QIOPEN="TCP","smtp.viaxmail.de",25 CONNECT MAIL FROM: <[email protected]> 250 OK RCPT TO: <[email protected]> 250 2.1.0 OK 354 End data with <CR><LF>.<CR><LF> 250 2.0.0 Ok: queued as 8DB438049D QUIT 221 2.0.0 Bye EMAIL ok In case the E-mail was send correctly and the mail server accepted the E-mail for forwarding, you get the final “Email ok” message and otherwise “Error Email”. Moreover the E-mail re- cipient should receive a status E-mail with just the line “E-mail delivery set!”. By means of the “Configure E-mail” menu item you may also send currently stored measure- ment data immediately if you respond ‘n’ to the question “Change(y/n)?” but ‘y’ to “Send email(y/n)?”. If you are connected by RS232 the E-mail is send immediately, else if you are connected by GSM, USB or Bluetooth interface, the mail is send as soon as the active connection will be closed. If you need to contact our technical support, please provide the protocol of the failed test E-mail delivery, what is important to analyze a problem. 6.4.2.6 Configure SMS The menu item “6. Configure SMS” in the GSM/Email menu is used to enter the needed phone numbers for the SMS1 delivery and to activate the delivery of SMS event and error mes- sages: SMS SERVICE CENTER2: +491710760000 SMS phone number: 016312345678 SMS alarm: off Change (y/n)? Legal insertions for the SMS service center number and the phone number of the SMS recipi- ent are up to 16 digits long. The number of the service center is always entered with plus sign 1 SMS – short message service for text messages consisting of maximal 160 characters 2 SMS Service Centre (SMSC) receives SMS messages from the telephone/radio network, forwards and stores messages if the receiver is currently not reachable. Page 50 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh headed international country dialing code. The phone number of the SMS recipient needs to be entered without country code. Moreover the hints to legal text fields contents given in the previous chapters 6.4.2.3 till 6.4.2.5 shall be observed. If the “SMS alarm” is active, short messages for the events “Battery voltage < 11,5V”, “Memory > 95% full” and “System error” are send within one minute after occurrence. If you change the SMS configuration and respond “y” to the “Send SMS (y/n)?” question, you should receive a test SMS with the content “SMS delivery set!”. If your computer is connected by RS232 cable locally, the protocol of the SMS delivery is shown in the terminal window: Send SMS... AT+CSCA="+491710760000" AT+CMGF=1 AT+CSMP=17,167,0,241 AT+CNMI=2,1,0,0,0 AT+CMGS="016312345678" SMS ok If the SMS delivery was successful the protocol is ended with “SMS ok” otherwise with “Er- ror SMS”. Similar to the delivery of E-mails the delivery of SMS is delayed if you are connected by GSM, Bluetooth or USB interface until this active connection is closed. If you face problems with E-mail or SMS configuration or delivery and contact our technical support, please provide the connection protocol as text or snapshot attached to a send E-mail. The connection protocol is essential for a failure analy- sis. 6.4.3 GPS Module (optional) In case the viasis 3003 is equipped with a GSM/GPRS modem an additional GPS module for the determination of the position of the viasis can be build in. The position data are determined regularly and they are transferred as a position list to viagraph. The last position is also send in the text of the viasis emails: Information: Viasis 3003 - Version 4.16 Serial number: 15SC9991 Active parameter set: 1 Interface options: Bluetooth, USB, GSM/Email, GPS GPS: 20.09.15, 09:45:00, 51°03.5615',N, 007°00.9070',E Date: 20.09.2015, Sunday Time: 11:15:33 Number of values = 24274, Memory full: 6 % Battery voltage: 13,17 V If you open a viasis measurement data file (*.vtf) with viagraph or you make a direct connec- tion to a viasis with GPS module and click the Tools menu in the viagraph menu bar of the Settings window, see illustration 33, the menu item GPS coordinates is selectable. If your computer is connected to the Internet and after a click to the Tools menu item GPS coordinates viagraph will open your standard web browser with the Google Maps web site and sends the viasis GPS coordinates. The web browser shows then the map with the last viasis position, see illustration 47: Page 51 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Illustration 47: GPS coordinates of the viasis position in Google maps In a direct connection to the viasis the last, most current GPS position is displayed. From an open vtf measurement data file the first GPS position of the chosen evaluation time period is shown. If you enter 3 in the Radio modem menu in the viagraph terminal you will receive the menu for the GPS module: GPS menu: 1. Position list 2. Formatted data output 3. Raw data (NMEA-183) 4. Position fix time: 24h 5. Back Your choice 1...5? Due to the high energy consumption of the GPS module the position determination is not done permanently. Instead the position is determined after the viasis power on and further continu- ously repeated after the time set in the Position fix time. The fixation of the position, may just need 30 seconds but also up an hour at unfavorable mounting positions, where the viasis is placed in the satellites signal shadow behind large buildings, walls, trees or other obstacles. After the position data are determined the GPS module is immediately shut down. During the GPS data output, see chapters 6.4.3.2 and 6.4.2.3, the measurement of vehicles is stopped, but not during the set regular position fixes. 6.4.3.1 GPS position list After insertion of 1 in the GPS menu you will get first the number of stored GPS positions, for example: Number of GPS positions = 5 Send data (y/n)? Page 52 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh If you enter ‘y’ the output of the position list will start: 30.09.15, 15:47:00, 51°03.5647',N, 007°00.9108',E 30.09.15, 11:46:00, 51°03.5574',N, 007°00.9081',E 30.09.15, 07:45:00, 51°03.5587',N, 007°00.9086',E 30.09.15, 03:41:00, 51°03.5593',N, 007°00.9076',E 29.09.15, 23:40:00, 51°03.5599',N, 007°00.9082',E Delete data (y/n)? Up to 25 GPS positions can be memorized. Because the oldest position in the list is automati- cally overwritten by the newest position it is in principle not necessary to clear the list ever. Separated by colons the viasis system date (DD.MM.YY) and time (hh:mm:ss), the latitude in degree and minutes with 4 decimal digits, N/S for northern/southern latitude, the longitude in degree and minutes with 4 decimal digits and finally E/W for eastern/western longitude of the fixed position is shown in a line. To make the correlation between viasis measurement data and GPS coordinates easy, the viasis system date and time and not the satellite time (UTC1) is stored in the GPS position list. 6.4.3.2 Formatted GPS data output After entering 2 for Formatted data output in the GPS menu, you will get following hint first: End with <CTRL-Z> What means you can stop the formatted output of GPS coordinate data by pressing the <CTRL2> and the ‘z’ key simultaneously. After the repeating headline the result of the GPS position determination follows once per se- cond: Satellites,UTC,Latitude,N/S,Longitude,E/W,HDOP 0, ... 2,073002, 2,073003, 3,073004, 8,073005,5103.5582,N,00700.9059,E,0.96, ... Satellites,UTC,Latitude,N/S,Longitude,E/W,HDOP 8,073021,5103.5581,N,00700.9059,E,0.96, 8,073022,5103.5580,N,00700.9058,E,0.96, ... 9,073031,5103.5585,N,00700.9049,E,0.89, 10,073032,5103.5587,N,00700.9050,E,0.84, The first number is number of found satellites. As soon the first satellite signal is received by the GPS menu the UTC satellite time, here 07:30:02 (AM) appears. 1 UTC – Universal time coordinated 2 CTRL – control key, depending on your keyboard, might also labelled with CTL or likewise Page 53 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh As soon 3 to 4 satellites signals could be found appears the output of position data – the lati- tude in degree and minutes with 4 minute decimals, the N/S latitude information and the analogous data for the longitude. The last number, the HDOP1 value is a measure for the horizontal, two dimensional variation of the measured GPS data. GPS position data with a HDOP value greater than 10 are not pre- cise and not usable. With the GPS data output you may check if a sufficient number of satellites re- spectively the GPS position is found at a viasis mounting place within a reasonable time. In tunnels or in between high buildings the determination of the GPS position might be impossible. In such a case switch the GPS position deter- mination off, see chapter 6.4.3.4, in order to avoid a permanent searching GPS module with the consequence of a reduced operation time of a viasis with battery supply. 6.4.3.3 GPS raw data (NMEA-183 protocol) The GPS raw data output delivers position data coded according the nautical standard NMEA2 developed for the communication between navigation system of ships. These ASCII block data send once per second are a bit confusing, but include numerous information, amongst other things e. g. to the satellites, whose data were used for the calculation of the position: $GPRMC,073114.000,A,5103.5574,N,00700.9062,E,0.00,0.00,011015,,,A*64 $GPVTG,0.00,T,,M,0.00,N,0.01,K,A*3C $GPGGA,073114.000,5103.5574,N,00700.9062,E,1,7,1.05,75.5,M,47.6,M,,*63 $GPGSA,A,3,05,25,26,29,31,21,23,,,,,,1.36,1.05,0.86*01 $GPGSV,3,1,12,29,71,062,52,31,54,235,46,26,44,296,48,25,40,118,49*70 $GPGSV,3,2,12,21,37,178,37,39,28,157,,05,16,067,46,16,16,296,44*79 $GPGSV,3,3,12,20,11,116,47,23,09,320,45,02,09,039,44,12,,,39*4D $GPGLL,5103.5574,N,00700.9062,E,073114.000,A,A*57 In the Internet and the literature a lot of publications describe the contents of the NMEA-183 data blocks, therefore we resign to do it here. Similar to the formatted data output, see chapter 6.4.3.2, the output of the GPS raw data can be stopped by simultaneous pressing of the <CTRL> and ‘z’ key. 6.4.3.4 GPS position fix time A few minutes after the viasis power on the determination of the GPS position is done. The Position fix time is the time period after which the determination is regularly repeated. After insertion 4 in the GPS menu, following prompt appears: Position fix time = You may enter values between 1 and 255 hours for the position determination interval. The default value is 24 hours. If you enter 0 the determination of the GPS position is deactivated. If no valid GPS position can be determined within 60 minutes, the position search will be can- celled and the GPS module will be switched off until the next viasis power on in order to avoid a fast unwished battery discharge. This might be the case when operating the viasis within buildings, tunnels or behind high buildings. 1 HDOP – Horizontal dilution of precision 2 NMEA - National Marine Electronics Assoziation Page 54 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.5 Menu information and Time The menu Information and time, which is reached by inserting 6 in the main menu, is headed by general information to the viasis soft- and hardware: Information: Viasis 3003 version 4.16 , H4 Serial number: 15SC9991 Active parameter set: 1 Comments: Via traffic controlling GmbH, Maybachstr. 39, 51381 Leverkusen Interface options: Bluetooth, USB, GSM/Email, GPS 1. Protocol 2. Comments 3. Date: 04.09.2012, Tuesday 4. Time: 13:57:46 5. Daylight saving time: off 6. Back Your choice 1...6? The first line Viasis 300M3 Version 4.16, H4 includes viasis type designation, software ver- sion number and hardware release. The second line displays the unique serial number of the viasis device. Serial number, software and hardware release should be always at your hands in case you contact our technical support. Active parameter set shows the number of the active parameter set of the measurement and display operation, at the time the menu is called. If at this time no parameter set is valid the number 0 (null) is given. The item comments shows typically information like measurement location or other given user information, see also chapter 6.5.2. The comment line is missing if not set. In case that radio modem interfaces like Bluetooth, GSM/Email or other optional serial inter- faces as USB are installed and detected during the power on initialization of the viasis they are listed in the last line of the information header. 6.5.1 Protocol The viasis system includes a ring buffer for a protocol of event and error messages. If the ring buffer is full the new messages overwrite the oldest messages. An explicit deletion of old mes- sages is for a proper function of the protocol therefore not necessary. If the protocol is selected by the entry 1 in the menu Information and time the number of stored messages is displayed and you are prompted, whether the protocol shall be send or not: Number of log entries = 25 Send data (y/n)? If you insert „y“ for yes, the list of protocol messages is send (example): Power on; 31.01.12;12:54:50 Error Xmodem packet type; 30.01.12;17:49:10 Page 55 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Power on; 30.01.12;17:39:34 Firmware update; 30.01.12;17:39:09 Power on; 30.01.12;15:30:59 Power on; 30.01.12;15:29:35 Error USB; 30.01.12;15:29:25 Start of measurement; 16.12.11;16:52:10 Power on; 16.12.11;16:51:07 Error Xmodem timeout; 16.12.11;15:41:24 Start of measurement; 16.12.11;15:39:58 Power on; 16.12.11;15:35:10 <Continue with Return> Each protocol entry is followed by date and time of occurrence. After the output of the protocol you are prompted, whether the protocol shall be deleted or not: Delete data (y/n)? As already mentioned you may erase the protocol, for an actual, continuous operation of the log is this not necessary. The size of the protocol message buffer depends on the size of the installed flash memory and is for 2/4/8 MB storage 191/191/255 protocol entries. 6.5.2 Comment – text field In the comment text field a text string with a length of 80 characters can be stored. In most cases will this be sufficient to store information about the exact measurement location with postal code, city, street and number and the measured lane direction. The data of the comment text field are transferred in the header of the viasis measurement data file (VTF file) and will be shown in the viagraph software in the comment field of evaluation charts and spread sheets. Allowed characters are alphanumeric characters, like letters, digits and punctuation marks, but without question mark ‚?’ and colon ‚:’, because both characters are used in the viasis menu control. To delete the comment content enter <Blank> followed by < Return>. 6.5.3 System date and time The date is to be entered with long year format after the choice 3 in the menu Information and time. That means dates with year century digits from 01.01.2011 till 31.12.2099 are legal. The viasis checks all date values within this range for correctness. Together with the date value the actual day of the week must be set. The correct operation of the parameter set time sched- ules (chapter 6.3.2) require a correct setting of the day of the week. The system time can be set with the selection 4 in the menu Information and time to time values between 00:00:00 and 23:59:59 o’clock. Incorrect inputs as wrong separator characters, time or date values are rejected by a repetition of the input prompt. Page 56 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh A call of the menu items Date and Time is refused by the viasis as long as measurement data are stored. This to avoid inconsistent measurement sequences, which may cause later problems during the data evaluation. In case you receive the message „Access impossible!“ if you try to change system date or time then download and store the measurement data first. Erase the data and hereafter the change of time and date will be possible. The real time clock of the viasis never stops and works continuously with the internal lithium buffer battery if the lead-gel main battery is removed. The operating time of the lithium battery is minimum 7.5 years. As more often the viasis is in operation, supplied from the main battery as longer lasts the lithium buffer battery. 6.5.4 Daylight saving time By pressing the key 5 for the Daylight saving time in the menu Information and time you can define its use. In the European Community the daylight saving time is used uniquely from the last Sunday in March till the last Sunday in October. The changes occur uniquely in all member states at 01:00 UTC (universal time) time. In the displayed sub menu, please select the correct time zone for your country: Daylight saving time: 1. off 2. UTC+0 3. UTC+1 4. UTC+2 Your choice 1...4? For the United Kingdom, Ireland, Portugal please choose “UTC+0”, for Spain, France, Ger- many, Poland “UTC+1” and for Greece and Finland “UTC+2”. For countries in time zone “UTC+1” (MEZ) the clock will be altered from 02:00 to 03:00 local time in March and from 03:00 to 02:00 local time in October. The selection 1 in the menu will switch the daylight saving time (Summer Time) off. 6.6 Online measurement The transfer of currently measured speed data over a serial data connection (cable RS232, USB or by radio Bluetooth and GSM modem) is done if you select the Online measurement in the viasis main menu. After the hint <Quit with return> sends the viasis vehicle speed data synchronous to the measure cycle all 1.5 seconds as long as a vehicle passes the radar beam towards the viasis. If the option Bidirectional Detection in the Settings menu is activated, see also chapter 6.3.3, additionally the speed data of vehicles passing the radar beam away from the speed display are send headed by a minus sign ‘-‘. The speed data are send as ASCII numbers, with variable width, what means one till three dig- its, followed by the control characters carriage return (hex 0x0A) and line feed (hex 0x0D), what means one speed number per line. So far the numeric display was not deactivated by the parameter LED display: off, see chapter 6.3.2.1, the speed measurements are also still shown on the numeric LED display. Page 57 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.7 Data memory The viasis measurement data store is organized as a ring storage, so in case the memory is full the oldest stored data are overwritten by the newest data. Herewith is guaranteed that the viasis still keeps the most actual data in case of a data overflow, respectively a too sporadic measurement data download and deletion. The viasis is either delivered with 2, 4 or 8 megabyte non volatile flash memory. The herein stored data have a retention of 20 years minimum according the manufacturer and the memory cells can be rewritten 100000 times (write/erase cycles), what means a total of 100000 meas- urements and parameter changes can be done, before statistically a memory failure should occur. The measured speed data stored as data blocks with 10 byte length in the memory. Therefore the storage capacity (minus some bytes for parameter and log protocol) is depending on the storage size of 2, 4 or 8 MB finally 212160, 425125 or 842952 measurement data blocks. This is equivalent at a radar range of 120 meter and an average vehicle speed of 50 km/h about 36833, 73806 or 146345 vehicles. The measurement data store should be deleted after a data download in order to keep the amount of read data and the data transfer times small. 6.7.1 Read measurement data For the download of stored measurement data of the viasis you can use the program viagraph delivered on CDROM, see chapter 6.1.3 or the ViaApp for Android Smartphones, see chapter 6.1.1. Illustration 48 In order to start the data download with viagraph the data connection to the viasis must have been established successfully, see also illustration 11. Click on the button „Read data“ and the data transfer progress appears, but maybe just for a glimpse depending on the number of data, see illustration 48. Next the dialogue to save the data in a file appears, see il- lustration 49. You may change or extend the proposed file name. In order to keep a good over- view over numerous data files you may e. g. add the meas- urement location to serial number and download date already given in the filename. With a click on the “Save” button store the data to your computer’s hard disk drive. Illustration 49: Save data file Page 58 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Select whether you want to delete the measurement data in the viasis or not, see also illustration 50. Also in case the viasis measurement data storage is empty a file with the file name extension *.VTF (“via traffic format) is created. The file includes the protocol with event and error messages, the current parameter setting of the system and eventually GPS position data. Illustration 50 6.7.2 Checking stored measurement data A check how much and which measurement data are stored in the viasis you can make by en- tering 1 for “Transmit stored data” in the main menu, see also illustration 11. If no values are stored the viasis returns immediately back to the main menu, otherwise it re- ports the number of stored speed values: Number of values = 21233 It follows the question: Send data (y/n)? If you enter y the measurement data are send to the terminal, always 25 lines before you are prompted to continue with <return>: 25;16.12.11;16:52:10 -32;16.12.11;16:52:12 44;16.12.11;16:52:33 38;16.12.11;16:52:35 ... <Continue with return> Per line one speed value optional headed by a minus sign indicating leaving vehicle detection, with date and time, and separated by semicolons is send. If you press any key other as <return> the output is ended. After the data output or if you entered n for Send Data (y/n)? following message appears: Delete data (y/n)? If you enter j for yes in the terminal all data are deleted, if N for no is given the current meas- urement is continued. In case the ring data storage is full the oldest data are overwritten by the actual data. Page 59 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.8 Test functions The test functions menu is shown if you enter 3 in the main menu, see also illustration 11 . Test functions: 1. LED display 2. Flash memory 3. Real time clock 4. Main battery 5. Simulation 6. Light sensor 7. Back Your choice 1...7? The test LED-display shows first „19.9“ on the numeric LED display in the LED base color, then if equipped in the second LED color and if defined in the last optional mixed LED color with rising brightness in 1%, 2%, 4%, 8%, 16%, 32%, 64% and 100% of the maximal bright- ness each time for 1,5 seconds. The current value of the LED brightness is also transferred via data connection to a terminal. If the LED mixed color is defined „124“ is displayed in varying color balances, afterwards „124“ is shown in blinking mode in the installed LED colors. For the following LED display up- and down count test the start and end count value is taken from the set minimal- and maximal speed displayed parameters defined in parameter set 1, see chapter 6.3.4.2. Each count value is shown ¾ seconds on the numeric LED speed display. Further the thresholds for blinking LED display, LED color change and LED mixed color, as well as for the integrated warning symbols defined in parameter set 1 are recognized for the equivalent display. Optional installed extensions see chapter 6.3.6, are activated during the up- and down count test depending if their on/off threshold is exceeded by the count value, or not. The Flash memory test indicates the installed memory size first: 4 MB Flash installed The flash memory test destructs stored measurement data and the event protocol, therefore follows the question: All data will be deleted Continue (y/n)? If you perform the test the proper function of all memory cells is checked by erasing and re- writing the cell contents: Erase Page: 4096 ok Write Page: 4096 ok The flash memory cells (bits) are organized in so called pages (256, 512 or 1024 bytes of 8 bits). In case of an error the test stops at the erroneous page and the error is reported. Else the proper memory function is confirmed with ok after the last page was tested. The test of the Real time clock includes beside the output of date and time a compare test be- tween a microcontroller and a real time clock time, generated from their crystal oscillator frequencies. Is the compare time difference smaller than 50 ppm (parts per million), equivalent Page 60 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh to an error of less than about 30 seconds per week, the message „RTC ok!“ is send, otherwise the error is reported in ppm units. The Main battery test allows the measurement of the lead-gel accumulator voltage and estima- tion about its charge condition. The measurement is made in contrary to the battery test during power on initialization without load, that means without active LED display of „188“ and can be initiated therefore also remotely by a GSM modem. The result is given with 0,1 Volt resolu- tion between 10,7 and 13,8 Volt (17 Ah accumulator discharge and full charge voltage levels). The test Simulation is useful in order to check the numeric LED speed display but also for a functional test of installed system extensions, as additional text displays, switches like opto- couplers, relays or warn lights at a simulated vehicle, without the need to install and measure on a road site with vehicle traffic. Further the made parameter settings defined in the parameter sets, resp. their effects on the behavior of the numeric LED display can be simply tested. After the test is called you are asked to enter a test speed and the number of the parameter set, whose parameters shall be recognized for the simulation: Test speed=51 Parameter set=1 <Quit with return> The test speed value is compared with the speed threshold parameters defined in the parameter set, resp. the threshold parameters of the Settings menu and the submenus Thresholds Exten- sions and Speed display options, for the numeric LED display, the integrated LED circle symbols, optional extensions and they are activated accordingly. Only if the test speed in the range between set minimal and maximal speed displayed, see chap- ter 6.3.4.2 the test speed is shown on the numeric LED speed display. By pressing the <return> key the LED display and all system extensions are reset and deactivated. The environment Light sensor, which measures the brightness of the environment, delivers for a functional check a numerical result: <Quit with Return> Light sensor: 955 The result drops in bright sun light down to zero. In dusk, dawn and darkness the given results are high and tend up to the maximal value 1023. In case the sensor value does not change de- spite illumination e. g. with a torch or by dark covering, it is defective. The position of the light sensor in the LED display board is approximately in the middle, right aside the hundred digit. 6.9 Data evaluation The evaluation of measured speed data is done with the delivered software viagraph. The in- stallation of the evaluation program viagraph is already described in chapter 6.1.3. A detailed description of the evaluations you will find in the online help of the viagraph pro- gram in the menu Help – User Manual1. 1 In order to read the help documents you need to install Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 3 or higher. In the internet you will find Adobes website with http://www.adobe.com/. Page 61 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.10 Viasis PLUS display The add-on display board of the viasis PLUS is in general a two line LED full matrix with own separate microcontroller with the „Viamatrix“ firmware and a flash memory for the display text, bitmap graphics and display parameters. The following description shows how configure the viasis PLUS by using the viagraph input window, which is reached by a click on the Ma- trix button, see illustration 11. The viasis PLUS display can also be completely configured by using any terminal software and the Viamatrix menu system, which is called by entering <ESC> in the viasis main menu: Viamatrix menu 1. Text messages 2. User character bitmaps 3. Test functions 4. Parameter 5. Information 6. Back Select 1 .. 6 Illustration 51: Viasis PLUS From the Viamatrix menu you get back to the viasis menu if you enter ‚6’ for Back. Attention: Before you close a communication connection and if you used the Viamatrix menu before - return always to the viasis menu. Otherwise the Viamatrix program will wait for further menu insertions and will not show any matrix message until you returned to the viasis menu. The Viamatrix program has an input menu timeout of 30 seconds until it returns automatically back to the next upper menu level or resp. to the viasis menu, what makes the “forgot to re- turn” problem less grave. But depending on the Viamatrix menu level where closed the connection it still may need several minutes until matrix messages are given again. The Viamatrix software Test functions and the Information menu are not supported by viagraph and can be reached therefore only by the menu system. As the viasis parameter settings the matrix display pages, bitmaps and parameters can be set offline if you click on the menu Extra – Matrix – viasis PLUS in the viagraph start window, see illustration 32. Together with the viasis parameter settings a file can be created (see chapter 6.2.4.1) and stored on an USB flash stick for a later upload in the viasis. The speed thresholds for the activation of the matrix display pages are part of the viasis param- eter sets, see also chapter 6.3.6.5. Page 62 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.10.1 Viasis PLUS matrix editor – display pages After a mouse click to the viasis PLUS Matrix button in the viagraph connection window (illustration 11) the matrix editor appears and in case the viasis is directly connected with the current settings: Illustration 52: Matrix editor main window The left part of the window is used to edit the LED display pages, each consists of two text lines. Which page is currently enabled for editing is selected with the check boxes in the middle column showing the current line contents, see illustration 52. The two white input lines in the upper left corner of the window are used to enter the needed display text or symbols. Legal are all printable 7 bit ASCII characters, what means letters, dig- its and most punctuation marks, except quotation marks (“), which are used to label bitmaps and placeholders in the text. Below the lines in the group field Line 1 scroll and Line 2 scroll determine the buttons Left, Off and Right, if the line text is displayed static or if the text is scrolled through the matrix line to the right or to the left. In the group field Color you can define for a two color viasis PLUS matrix, which LED color is shown and if the text is shown permanently or in a flashing mode. The black back grounded output fields in the middle column of the windows show how the text lines will be later displayed on the viasis PLUS LED matrix. The entered text will be displayed centered in the matrix display. If you need a left- or right bound display add spaces to the right or left of the text. Before you close the matrix editor, respectively if you modified all display pages as you wanted send them to the viasis with the Transfer button otherwise all changes are lost. Page 63 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.10.2 Viasis PLUS matrix editor – bitmaps Beside text the LED matrix can also show so called bitmap graphic. In the right column of the matrix editor window up to 31 bitmap graphic characters can be defined: Illustration 53: bitmap column at right side of the matrix editor As bitmaps also country specific special characters, as Umlauts, apostrophic characters, etc., can be defined. By a click on the number button left of the bitmap the character or the graphic is placed in the active line, respectively in its text at the current cursor position, see also illus- tration 53, Bitmap 17. In the page line the bitmap is placed by its bitmap number, delimited by apostrophes (e. g. ’17’), therefore the use of apostrophes in the text is not allowed. In order to edit or create new bitmaps double click with the mouse the bitmap picture behind the number button and the bitmap editor will appear. 6.10.3 Bitmap editor A pixel (LED) is activated / deac- tivated with a left/right mouse click in the bitmap editor. With the but- ton Delete all pixel are cleared. Before you start editing the bitmap set the width of your bitmap, resp. the number of needed LED col- umns with Width button. The max- imal width of the bitmap is the ma- trix column width, which can be found in the Viamatrix menu In- Illustration 54: Bitmap editor formation. Page 64 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 6.10.4 Matrix editor menu Tools In the matrix editor menu Tools – Text you will find the menu items Load and Save. With Save you can store edited display pages on your computer hard disk in a text file (*.txt), with Load you can load already saved display page text files. Illustration 55: Matrix editor tools menu If you click one of the Text menu items the Windows standard dialogues for “file save as”, resp. “file open” will appear. Besides the text also edited bitmaps can be stored from or loaded into the matrix editor by the menus Tools – Bitmap – Load and Save. Predefined placeholder like date1, time in short format (hh:mm) or long format (hh:mm:ss) can be inserted like bitmaps in the lines of the display pages, by a mouse click to the wished line position and hereafter by a click to the menu Tools – Placeholder with the selection of Time1, Time2, Date or Placeholder. Within the display page lines the placeholders are shown as apostrophe delimited numbers, which start at ‘127’ (short time format), similar to the bitmaps (‘1’ – ‘31’). The value or content of placeholders are determined or calculated just before they are displayed. Placeholders for time and date can be used for example together with a permanent shown text page and a 230V net supplied viasis, see also chapter 6.11. Placeholders are further used in special software which displays calculated money or point penalties depending on the measured over speeding. 6.10.5 Permanent text page The viasis PLUS offers the possibility to define a Permanent shown page, that means a dis- play page shown if no other page is activated due to vehicle detection above the set speed thresholds. Be aware: The energy consumption of a permanent shown LED text in compare to the short time activated, switched text due to vehicle detections, is very high and therefore only appropriate for 230V mains supplied viasis PLUS. For viasis PLUS with 12V ac- cumulator is this no option due to the strong reduction of operating time. For the configuration of a permanent text page proceed as follows: - In the Viamatrix menu Parameter – Number of text pages, see menu chapter 6.10, rise the number from 4 to 5. - In the Viamatrix menu Parameter – Permanent text page enter page number 5. Permanent text page 0 means deactivated. - Return to the viasis main menu 1 The time and date clock of the Viamatrix, whose values appear in the matrix lines, are loaded from the viasis real time clock (RTC) at power on. So changes at the viasis time and date settings, see chapter 6.5.3 get valid on the matrix after the next power on. Page 65 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh If you click now the Matrix button in the viagraph connection window again the new 5. Dis- play page gets visible if you scroll down with the scrollbar of the middle display column. Together with the already set placeholders for date and time the permanent 5th text page looks like in the matrix editor as follows: Illustration 56: Matrix editor with date and time placeholder in permanent display page 6.11 Select switch option For the selection of the display parameters the viasis can be optionally delivered with a rotary turn switch. The turn switch is located in the accumulator box on the control unit board; please see following illustration 57 below. Illustration 57: Select switch parameter sets Page 66 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh If the select switch is in position of the clock symbol the viasis works in normal mode. This means the display parameters of the parameter sets 1 to 5 are activated by the time settings of their weekly calendar. In case the turn switch is in position 1 to 5 the display parameters of the selected parameter set (see also chapter 6.3.1) are permanently active. If the viasis is used at various, changing measurement locations with differing local speed lim- its, the switch offers the possibility to change quickly the display parameters to appropriate values of an another parameter set. 7 Technical and physical properties 7.1 Distance range The detection distance range of all microwave detectors depends to a large extend to reflection properties of the measured objects and interference properties of the near surrounding. In common is valid: As bigger, planer and orthogonal to the microwave beam axis the reflection surface is, as longer is the distance range. As less absorbing and scattering the reflection surface, as longer is the distance range. As more other objects are in measurement beam, as shorter is the distance range (dif- fraction scattering and foliage losses, shadow losses and so on). Practically following factors have a reducing effect to the distance range: High up to the edge of the driveway leading buildings, trees, poles, parked cars and containers, which hamper the „free sight“ of the detector and/or lead to strong scatter- ing losses. Influence through weather, rain and snow lead to absorption losses of the radar „Blinding of the detector“ through other moving objects as tree branches, persons, resp. a reduction of the detection range by a too far in the leaving traffic directed radar beam, see also chapter 5.2. The above mentioned negative influences have practically a much smaller meaning than it may seem now, but it makes clear that the reason for a too small distance range is only in rare cases a deficient microwave detector. In the free field the radar unit has a typical distance range of more than 120 m for genuine pas- senger cars. Each viasis is tested before delivery regarding a sufficient distance range. For trucks the distance range is about 50% higher due to the larger reflection front surface, for motorcycles it is reduced to 50% and less. The distance from where the numeric LED display can be read due to the chosen digit size is also higher than 120 meter. The highest distance range has a detector mounted in a height of 2 up to 3 meter to the hous- ing bottom side. This offset from the ground results from the practically necessary small inclination of the microwave antenna inside the display housing. Page 67 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 7.2 Measurement angle The angle between detector beam axis and the movement axis of the detected vehicles has de- cisive influence on the measured speed. Microwave detectors and all on the physical „Doppler“ principle based measurement systems (some laser, most infrared and ultrasonic) do not meas- ure the absolute speed of a vehicle. They measure the relative speed or exactly the angular speed vector component of a vehicle moving towards the radar beam axis. This is expressed by following formula: vmeasure = vabsolute x cos with : measuring angle The ideal measurement angle is 0°, this means vmeasure = vabsolute and the movement axis and the radar beam axis are identical in this case. In practice the system board can only be mounted laterally, besides the driveway. But you don’t get a measurement error outside the specified accuracy, if you are aware the limits of the measurement angle (see chapter 5.2). Please notice the following: A too large measurement angle can only have a too small speed value as result! Up to a measurement angle of 4° (equal to which direction) the relative speed meas- ured by the detector and the absolute speed are the same through the rounding of the not displayed digits. 7.3 Accuracy The accuracy of the speed value is: 2% and 1 digit, for the whole measurement range Herewith the accuracy is better than specified for repressive velocity measurement systems in the German „Eichordnung“ of the „Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt“ ( 3% for v > 100 km/h and 3 km/h for v < 100 km/h). Despite this fact, this system is not used in Germany for repressive measurements, because it is not equipped with a electronic calibration circuitry, what is claimed by the „Eichordnung“. Also in future we won’t design the system in this way, because the pedagogical intention of this system for visual speed indication would be mislead. 7.4 Display field and visibility The display field consists of the 300 mm high LED digits and the 190 mm high digits of the integrated warning symbols. The chosen letter sizes guarantee readability above 100 Meter. The angle of readability of the LED digits is with 15° sufficiently high to be seen by the vehicle drivers with full brightness also in bright sunlight. However for spectators looking from aside the LED display just seem to glow depending on the viewing angle and may even disappear in bright sunlight (similar to the fiber optic signs on highways). In common the visibility decreases for LED with rising brightness of the environment a little bit. A „phantom light mask“ is placed in front of the LED, which suppress a seemingly glowing of the LED to a large extent when they reflect the sun light. Page 68 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh To avoid blinding effects of the vehicle drivers, especially during night-time or covered sky, the system is equipped with an environment light sensor and a LED brightness control with a reso- lution of 0,5% of the maximal brightness. 7.5 Display frequency The update frequency of numeric LED display is identical with the measurement frequency of the radar detector. As long a moving object is detected its speed is updated all 1,5 seconds on the numeric LED display. The last measured speed value is hold for about 3 seconds on the LED display. The display cycle of 1,5 s has emerged as ideal in comprehensive tests. The driver perceives the display frequency after interviews not as too high and therewith not too flurry. In contra- diction, the driver sees the displayed speed from a quite far distance, realizes that he is over speeding and slows down. On the display he (and the spectator) gets as a direct feedback the reduced speed displayed, let’s say as reward and the driver passes the display with the correct speed. Characteristic is that the driver has enough time to develop a feeling for the right speed. Hereby is the high distance range the decisive advantage. At a shorter distance range, the driv- er gets his over speeding displayed, but there is no time for a „dialogue“ between driver and display. The driver has no time to react and the feedback - the reward is missing as well. 7.6 Power supply and operating time 7.6.1 Accumulator version For the power supply a 12 Volt lead gel battery pack with a capacity of 17 Ah is installed in a small plastic box on the backside of the housing. The viasis has a discharge protection for the accumulator to prevent irreversible chemical de- composition of the battery electrolyte due to long time discharge below 10,7 Volt. The protection circuit disconnects the viasis from the battery when the voltage drops below 10,7 Volt and (re-)connects it when the battery voltage is 11,3 Volt minimum. The operating time of the viasis relies essentially on the number of displayed speed values, the environment brightness and self evidently on the battery capacity. In bright sunlight the power consumption due to maximum LED brightness is maximal 11 Watt when displaying “188” on the numeric LED display. By night with minimum LED brightness level the consumption is less than 1 Watt for displaying “188”. So the operating time of the viasis 3003 is at a display rate (relation between display on and off time) of 25%, with calculated 16 day and 8 night hours, for the 17 Ah battery about two weeks. 7.6.2 Mains supply 115/230 Volt AC version Attention: For viasis delivered as 115/230 Volt AC version do not remove or disconnected the buffer battery. The buffer battery delivers peak currents, filters mains distortions and ensures that the voltage level of the AC/DC power supply does not rise to illegal over voltage levels and blows the system fuses. Additionally the buffer battery allows the operation of the viasis at timely powered light poles and ensures an operation for several days if the mains line is switched off. In rare cases with the viasis connected to a heavily distorted mains supply it might be necessary to install a harmonic filter to ensure proper system operation. Page 69 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Attention: Work at 115V/230V installations must be generally carried out by electro-technically trained personnel or specialized companies, according to the relevant technical regulations 7.6.3 Viasis with photovoltaic solar support Attention: Never operate the Viasis with solar panel and disconnected main battery. Always connect the battery first before the solar panel. The solar charge module needs a buffer battery for proper operation and the clamp voltage of the solar module may rise in bright sun light to a destructive level for the electronic without connected lead-acid gel battery. 7.7 Operating temperature The semiconductor components used in our production including the LED’s are specified for industrial applications. That means an operating temperature range from -40 to +85 Celsius is guaranteed by the manufacturer. The microwave transceiver is specified for an operating temperature range from -20 to +70 Celsius. Outside these limits the manufacturers give no guarantee for a faultless function. 7.8 Water protection The industrial housing protection class is IP64 (compare EN 60529). IP64 means that the sys- tem is protected against intrusion of dust and the housing protected against water splashing from any direction. The housing is in any case sealed against rain water. Another thing is the problem of humidity, because the housing has two small drillings (Ø 2mm) at the housing bottom for pressure balancing. Strong temperature differences between a hous- ing interior and the surrounding produce a low pressure situation in the housing interior. Slow pressure compensation with the intrusion of humid environmental air may settle down moisture on the surface of the interior housing walls, also at the inner side of the front pane. The hous- ing has the two drill holes in the frame on the bottom side for pressure balancing and the drain of condensing water. 7.9 Radio wave interference Through the use of stereo-channel Doppler transceiver (radio wave transmitter and receiver) and an appropriate measure procedure with steady signal supervision the display of speed val- ues caused by interfering radio waves of other systems can be excluded. If the interfering signal is much stronger than the received radar signal of the viasis then the system stops operation. In such rare case you need to change the measurement place. Page 70 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 8 Maintenance 8.1 Cleaning the front window pane Attention: To clean a dirty front window pane use always a liquid antistatic detergent or an antistatic cleansing towel! Otherwise the transparent plastic front pane can be electrostatic charged up to sev- eral kilovolts (frictional electricity) especially when using dry paper or synthetic textile towels. The discharge pulse may destroy the semiconductor components in the microwave transceiver. A damaged or destroyed microwave transceiver reduces the measurement distance range or leads to a complete failure of the measurement display. 8.2 Charging and testing the lead acid battery The battery is discharged, if the voltage level drops below 10,7 Volt. The battery is separated below this level through the integrated low level discharge protection. Recharge the empty battery immediately to avoid irreversible chemical destruction. Attention: The batteries shall be stored only in loaded condition at dry loca- tions! The self-discharging of our delivered batteries is with 0,1% (at 20°C) of the loaded capacity per day very low, so that charged batteries can be stored also for longer times (½ year) without any problems. The battery voltage level can be checked under load condition at power on („188“ is displayed and the battery voltage value follows) and when you connect a laptop or PC and use the test function „main battery“, see also chapter 6.8, but without load. Is the battery voltage level below 11,3 Volt the viasis will not start operation. For the battery loading you should use our automatic battery charger, which stops loading at the high level battery voltage of about 13,8 Volt. If you use a battery charger with no overload protection, it might destroy the battery chemically if a voltage level of 13,8 Volt is exceeded. Reverse connection of batteries and charger are impossible with the viasis battery connectors which allow a plug in the coupling only in the correct way. Attention, if you use third party chargers: When connecting the cables of the battery, take care of the right polarity! Connect the black minus pole of the charger to the black minus pole of the battery and the red plus pole of the charger to the red plus pole of the battery. Lead-acid gel batteries can be charged reverse and herewith destroyed. Additionally the next connection to the viasis will cause a short circuit and blow the fuse in such a case. The time to load a completely empty 17 Ah battery with our battery chargers (load currents 2 Ampere) is approximately 10 hours to 90% of the battery capacity. The time to load the bat- tery to full capacity (charger LED load control extinguishes) can be much longer. Page 71 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 8.3 Changing the battery To withdraw the battery unfasten the cover brackets and open the cover of the battery box, placed on the backside of the viasis display system. Remove the plug of the battery cable from the control panel socket, see illustration 8. Untight- en the knurled nut above the turn bolt, turn the bolt aside and take out the battery. To install the battery proceed in reverse order. Attention: In case of two or more batteries – disconnect all empty batteries first before reconnecting the charged batteries. Otherwise the fuse(s) might be blown, due to the high current flow between empty and full batteries. When you close the battery box cover take care not to press or cut the battery cable wires. 8.4 Changing the fuse In order to change the main fuse open the cover of the battery housing on the backside of the display system. The main fuse holder is placed in the upper right corner of the control panel. Replace the fuse with a mini 5 Ampere inert vehicle plug in type fuse. Attention: Replace the fuse by the same type. Using fuses with higher cur- rent values means in worst case a burned down system, if an electric internal short circuit occurs! 8.5 Serial RS232 interface connector The serial RS232 D-SUB socket is placed on the control panel in the battery box. Only data receive and send line, signal ground line and shielding are connected by the interface cable. This means no hardware control (RTS, CTS, ....) for the data flow is supported. The pin connections (scheme see table below) at the 9 pole D-SUB connector of the interface cable comply to the RS232C interface standard, used in almost every personal computer, lap- top or palmtop. Should the communication be impossible even after correct setting of the interface parameter and the right serial port chosen, check the interface description of your computer manual. It might be necessary to exchange the RxD and TxD line at the D-SUB con- nector. If you have a computer with 25 pole DSUB serial interface connector, a ready-made adapter to the 9 pole DSUB connector of the interface cable can be purchased in computer trade shops or from us. pin signal description 2 TxD viasis transmit data 3 RxD viasis receive data 5 GND Ground Page 72 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 8.6 Trouble shooting No „188“ value displayed after power on Prove connection between battery clamps and control panel connector for intermittent cable wires. Are the connector/socket contacts deformed or cor- roded? Check the main fuse in the battery box. Control the battery voltage – are 11,3 Volt present at the connectors when connecting the battery? If you are not successful, you have to send us the system back for repair. „188” does not disappear after power on Send us the system back for repair. „188“ flashes after power on continuously Reason is probably an old or defective battery, which lost its energy storing capacity. Retry it with a new battery. If you do not succeed contact us. No speed value appears during vehicle detection Has the viasis „free sight“ to the vehicles? Is the viasis straightened correctly (chapter 5 foll.)? Are other high frequency wave radiating installations like high voltage lines, radar or radio antennas in the near surrounding? Is the minimal or maximal displayed speed set correctly (see chapter 6.3.4.2)? Is the Led display deactivated in the actual valid parameter set (see chapter 6.3.2.1)? Is the measurement time limited in the time schedule of the currently valid parameter set (see also chapters 6.3.2 foll.). Has the sensitivity of the radar been reduced (see chapter 6.3.7)? If you don’t succeed contact our technical support first. Car speedometer and display value are not equal Car speedometers are not calibrated and show a remarkably higher speed than the real physi- cal speed of a vehicle. To check the accuracy of the measured speed no car speedometer can be used, except it was calibrated by the manufacturer (what is not done for serial cars). An exact check of the accuracy must be made with a calibrated reference system (with radar, laser, infrared or other optical methods) or a police car with calibrated speedometer. If you have anyhow the impression that the displayed speed value is too low read chapter 5.1, 5.2 and 7.2 first. If you don’t succeed contact our technical support first. Page 73 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Unmotivated speed values are displayed Are moving objects in the range of the detector, like crossing traffic, moving branches of trees, birds, bicycles, pedestrians and so on? If you don’t find any causes for the malfunction, contact us and send the system back. The numeric LED display shows characters, which are not numbers The system has an internal defect, contact us and send it back for repair. 8.7 Transport damages Packing wrap damaged: Unpack in presence of the delivering transport driver and let him confirm possible damages of the display system on the delivery notes. Packing wrap all right, packing contents damaged: Inform the hauler immediately and demand for an inventory of the damaged display system, if possible tell the transport driver to note the damage. Important: Under all circumstances, to avoid the loss of compensation through the transport insurance or from the hauler, inform the hauler within 24 hours. The delivered systems have to remain in the same condition until the examination by the insurance took place. 8.8 Sending back/transport preparation/disposal Before you send the system for repair contact our support. Sometimes systems do not operate due to parameter settings or other reasons, often we may also offer a less expensive transport way. Send parcels with „receiver pays cargo fees“ are not accepted. Error description: For a faster treatment of your repair, please write us a short error description and name us a contact person for possible questions of our side. Packing wrap: In order to lessen the risk of transport damages, the system should be send generally only in a complete original packing set. Every wrapping is usually used for maximal two ways. Although the cardboards may lose their mechanical stability, the foamed plastic bodies can be used more often. If you cannot store the packing material we are ready to take it back. If the original packing set is fully or partly lost, the empty packing set can be ordered from us (only complete). Take-back and disposal of old systems: We take back and dispose our systems free of cost. We disassemble the systems, sort the parts and materials, which are recycled or if possible reused. Send parcels with „receiver pays cargo fees“ are not accepted. Please mark the systems clearly ‘for disposal’. Page 74 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 9 Viasis 3003 certification, conformity and compliance 9.1 CE-conformity viasis 3003 CE Declaration of Conformity in accordance with the EC directives 2014/53/EC (RE) and 2011/65/EC (ROHS) The manufacturer: Via traffic controlling GmbH Declares that the product: viasis 3003 (COMPACT, MINI, PLUS, PLUS SMILE) Intended purpose: Speed measurement system Type: Radio equipment Equipment class: 1 Complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the RE (radio equipment) directive, when used for its intended purpose: - Health and safety requirements pursuant to article 3.1a, according low voltage directive 2014/35/EU - Protection requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility article 3.1b, according electromagnetic compatibility directive 2014/30/EC - Air interface of the radio systems pursuant to article 3.2 Harmonized standards applied: Other means of providing conformity with the EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009 + A1:2010 essential requirements (standards, specifications): EN 55022: 2011-12 EN 62311 (VDE 0848-211): 2008-09 EN 61000-4-2/3/8 : 2009-12/2011-04/2010-11 EN 50293: 2002-02 EN 300440-1(V1.6.1)/-2(V1.4.1): 2010-08 EN 301489-1/-3(V1.9.2/V1.4.1): 2011-09/2002-08 The system complies with directive 2011/65/EC (ROHS – restrictions on the use of hazardous sub- stances). Equipment marking: Address: Via traffic controlling Campusallee 1 D-51379 Leverkusen Germany Place and date: Leverkusen, 26 January 2016 Name and signature: Dipl.-Ing. (FH) J. Geßler Senior engineer 9.2 Viasis 3003 CE compliance and notification The viasis 3003 is tested according the applicable EN 300440 and EN 301489 test standards. A national notification according EC directive 2014/53/EC (RE) is for radio equipment class 1 not necessary, because these radio equipment operates in a EC wide harmonized frequency band (EC decision 2013/752/EU, band no. 70a, 24.15-24.25 GHz). The system can be operated and placed on the market in the European Community, including Switzerland and Norway. Further radio licenses or approvals are not needed within the Euro- pean Community and further legal limitations are yet not known. Page 75 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 9.3 CE-conformity Bluetooth module Laird 730-SA Test reports, declarations for ROHS and REACH compliance for the BLUETOOTH module you will find on the manufacturer website http://www.lairdtech.com/products/bt730-series. Page 76 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 9.4 CE expertise M10 Quectel GSM/GPRS radio module For the complete document with all attachments, please see the delivered CDROM in folder \Compliance\Quectel_M10. For the list of applied test standards please refer to chapter 10.3.6. Page 77 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 9.5 Viasis 3003 FCC and IC compliance The viasis 3003 speed display with integrated radar transceiver has been tested according FCC 15 rule 15.245 and IC standard RSS-210, issue 9, annex F. For FCC and IC certification and test reports regarding the contained Bluetooth module Laird 730-SA, please see the delivered CDROM in folder \Compliance\Blutooth_Laird_730-SA. For FCC and IC certification and test reports regarding the optional contained GSM/GPRS module Quectel M10, please see the delivered CDROM in folder \Compliance\Quectel_M10. Notice: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada li- cense-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Via traffic controlling GmbH may void FCC and IC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, us- es, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interfer- ence at his own expense. Page 78 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 10 Annex 10.1 Viasis 3003 list of equipment Name/ article Description/specification Transport casing With two transport rolls, 3 solid metal handles, 4 butterfly lock- ers, outside double profile frame, inside fitting plastic foam, see also photo 1 USB-RS232 adapter Adapter for the serial connection of RS232 devices to computer USB interfaces Spare battery 12V/ 17 Ah 12 Volt, 17 Ah, weight 6 kg Battery charger 2 A Automatic charger 12 Volt, 2 A, for 17 Ah Accumulator viasis aluminum tripod Stable tripod collapsible with telescope pole, weight 10 kg, tri- pod ground diameter up to 2.4m, material eloxated aluminum, viasis mounting height up to 2.1m, transport measures: 30cm x 32cm x 166cm, see photo 2 viasis steel tripod Robust, collapsible tripod with telescope pole, weight 12 kg, tripod ground diameter up to 1,7m, viasis mounting height up to 2,2 m. Pole fixation kit The 2 system holders are hanged-in the pole holder, mounted with high endurance steel ribbons with special theft protected closure, see photo 3. Photo 1: Transport casing Photo 2: viasis tripod Photo 3: Pole fixation kit Page 79 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 1 10.2 Technical Specifications viasis 3003 Doppler-radar: Transmit frequency 24.165 GHz Emitted output power < 100 mW (EIRP) Beam width (at 3dB points) 11 horizontal, 17° vertical Measurement angle <5 Speed display range 5 ... 199 km/h Accuracy 2 % 1 digit Distance range > 120 m Detection mode uni- or bidirectionnel Numeric LED display: AlInGaP High Power LED 2 ½ digits Exposure angle 15 Colors (EN12368, DIN6163-5) Yellow, 585-597 nm Red, 613-631 nm Green 489-508 nm White (x/y 0.35/0.38) Brightness reduction (by aging) < 10 % Lifetime > 10 years Letter size LED digits 300 mm Readability > 150 m Letter size LED digits ca. 1,5 s Hold time 3s Integrated Led warning symbols: Led circle diameter 300 mm Digit-/symbol height 190 mm Readability 120 m Fixed text: Letter height 100 mm Readability 80 m Data memory: Flash FIFO ring store 2/4/8 megabyte Write cycles/data retention 100000 / 20 years Serial Data interfaces: RS232 standard/connector RS232C,V24/DSUB 9 pole socket Data transfer parameter 8 data-, 1 stop-, no parity Data transfer speed 115200 Baud Data output ASCII, 1k xmodem and ymodem Bluetooth radio modem see chapter 10.2.4 USB host interface/connector USB 2.0, USB-B socket USB client interface/connector USB 2.0, USB-A socket Power supply: Rechargeable lead-gel accumulator 12 Volt / 17 Ah Electrical peak power 11 Watt Operating time 17 Ah battery 2 weeks Battery voltage level control 10.8V till 15 V, 0.1 V resolution Car fuse 5A inert, ISO8820-3 type F 1 Subject to technical change. Page 80 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Real time clock backup battery: Minimum lifetime 7,5 years Plug in 3V Lithium button cell CR2430 Housing: W x H x D in mm 640 x 548 x 1851 Weight (without battery) 12 kg Material frame Aluminum Front window pane Makrolon Protection class IP64, see chapter 7.8 Fixation 2 x 35 mm C profile rails Operating temperature range: -20 ... +70 Celsius 10.2.1 Supplementary data – viasis PLUS version Housing: W x H x D in mm 845 x 640 x 1851 Weight without battery 16,5 kg Power supply: Electrical peak power 18 Watt Operating time 17 Ah battery 1-2 weeks LED matrix: uni-/ or bicolor 2 lines with 1/2 x 8 x 48 LED Line distance 50 mm Line dimensions W x H in mm 100 x 500 10.2.2 Supplementary data – viasis PLUS SMILE version Housing: W x H x D in mm 845 x 640 x 1851 Weight without battery 16 kg Power supply: Electrical peak power 14 Watt Operating time 17 Ah battery 2 weeks LED fixed text: Height text > 100 mm Diameter circle symbols 285 mm 10.2.3 Supplementary data – viasis MINI version Housing: W x H x D in mm 640 x 425 x 1851 Weight without battery 12 kg Power supply: Electrical peak power 11 Watt Operating time 17 Ah battery 2 weeks Fixed text: Text height 110 mm 1 Housing measures: Width and Height without installations (Handle, hinges,...), depth including battery box Page 81 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 10.2.4 Technical Data - Bluetooth modem Bluetooth modem type Laird BT730-SA (integral ceramic antenna) Bluetooth standard Version 2.0 / SPP Bluetooth class I / 18 dBm Range (free field) > 100m Data transfer rate > 75 kBaud in y-modem transfer Current consumption at 12V supply: - Not connected, standby 0,5 mA - Active connection 12 mA - Receive/Transmit operations 22 mA typical Operation temperature range -40° C to +85° C Compliance CE, FCC, IC 10.3 Technical data optional components 10.3.1 Technical data – Control panel USB USB host (computer) connector USB - B socket type USB client (USB-stick) connector USB - A socket type USB client supply voltage 5 Volt USB client supplied current 100 mA USB standard/specification USB 2.0 10.3.2 Technical data – 115V/230V mains supply Nominal input voltage 115V~ or 230V~ Minimal/maximal input voltage 90 V~ / 264 V~ Range 50 Hz mains frequency 47Hz to 63Hz Protection connector plug/-coupling IP67 (dust sealed, waterproof) Max. current/poles/ground contact code 16 A, 3 pole, 2L+PE, 6h, blue color code Plug-/coupling standard EN 60309, IEC 60309 (CEE 17) Page 82 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 10.3.3 Technical data – solar module Solar module technology polycrystalline photovoltaic cells Dimensions in mm 690 x 690 x 36 Nominal power 50 Watt1 Nominal-/Open clamp voltage 12V= / 21,7V= Weight without/with fixation 6.3kg / 13.3kg 10.3.4 Technical data – low voltage relays The relay board(s) and connector terminals are placed in an add-on housing on the viasis back plate. Information to connection schema, cable gland, etc. see manual sisrelais_216_e.pdf. In total 2 relay boards with 7 relays can be controlled by the viasis. Maximal assembly per board 7 mono stable changeover contact relays (SPDT) Terminal connections 4 x 3 (open, close, common contact) Max. switched voltage and power 400V~/150V=, 2000VA/192W Max. switched current 10A~/10A= Dielectric strength (1 minute) 1 kV/5kV between contacts/contact to coil Isolation transient over voltages 10000 VAC (for 1.2 x 50µs Max. on/off switch time 10ms/5ms Contact material Gold plated silver-alloy Minimal switch load 10 mA @ 5VDC Attention: - Relays shall not be used to switch inductive or capacitive loads, see chapter 10.3.4. If these loads are switched sparking occurs while the mechanical contacts are opened or closed, what will destroy the contacts surface in short time. - The gold plating of the relays evaporates at high switching pow- er, afterwards the relay cannot be used to switch small signals reliably anymore. 10.3.5 Technical Data – MOSFET power transistors The MOSFET power transistor boards and connector terminals are placed in an add-on hous- ing on the viasis back plate. Information to connection scheme, cable glands, etc. see manual sisrelais_216_e.pdf. In total 2 boards with 7 MOSFET high current transistors can be con- trolled by the viasis. 1 Currently used module type and power may change, please ask. Page 83 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh Maximal assembly per board 4 p-ch MOSFET power transistors Max. switched voltage (UGS @ 25°C) 20 Volt DC Maximal current (ID @ 25°C) 74 Ampere DC Maximal switch power (Ptot @ 25°C) 200 Watt Inner resistance (RDSon) 0,02 Ohm Switching times (ton/toff) < 200 ns Switch protection Reverse diode Source-Drain Hints: - MOSFET power transistors do not provide galvanic isolation between viasis electronic and switched load, but have no wear parts as relays have. - MOSFET power transistors switch inductive and capacitive loads without being damaged. - The MOSFET power transistors can additionally be controlled with an envi- ronment brightness dependent PWM (pulse width modulated) signal. Therefore they are appropriate for supplementary customer specific external LED dis- plays. 10.3.6 Technical Data - GSM/GPRS radio module and SIM card slot Type of radio module Quectel M10 Transmit frequencies quad band 850/900/1800/1900 MHz Maximal transmit power 2W @ 850/900 MHz, 1W @ 1800/1900 MHz CSD data transfer speed maximal 14,4 kBaud GPRS multislot class and mobile station class Slot 12/10/8 / Class B GPRS data transfer speed maximal 85,6 kBaud (up- and downlink) Data protocols and -interfaces PPP, TCP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMS, MMS, FAX SIM card slot standard Mini-SIM ISO/IEC 7810:2003 – ID-000 CE test and product standards EN301489-7 V1.3.1:2005 (EMC) EN301489-1 V1.8.1:2008 (EMC) EN301511 V9.0.2 (GSM radio spectrum) ETSI TS 151010-1 V1.8.0 (Mobile stations) EN60950-1 :2001+A11 :2004 (Electr. safety) Compliance CE, FCC, IC GSM/GPS combined antenna type Siretta Tango 19 GSM antenna gain 2dBi@ 900 MHz / 1 dBi@1900MHz Operating temperature range - 45° C to +85°C Page 84 of 85 via viasis 3003 user manual traffic controlling gmbh 10.3.7 Technical Data – GPS module GPS module Quectel L70, L1 band receiver 1575,42 MHz Power consumption during position fix 20 mA @ 12V (with active GPS antenna) Position fix time (TTFF) < 35 s (optimal satellite reception) Position accuracy < 2,5 meter (CEP) Operating temperature range -45° C to +85°C Page 85 of 85 Dimensions: 63,4 x 84,4 x 18,2 cm (W x H x D) PLUS viasis PLUS LED editor smile function speed limit function LED color change data storage The viasis PLUS allows you to set up your own LED texts and graphics. Thanks to the provided LED editor easily changeable at the site. For Example: • up to 25kph „THANK YOU“ • 30 - 40kph „SCHOOL ZONE“ • 25 - 30kph „CAUTION CHILDREN“ • over 40kph „TOO FAST“ (blinking) With data storage, LED color change, speed limit and smile function. Technical specifications: Details: • Speed limit function if speed limit is exceeded N E W ! - Shows the speed limit sign - Alternating between driven speed and speed limit sign • Smile function alternating • Adjustable parameters for min. and max. displayed speed, LED color change, blinking display, speed limit and smile function •••••• •••••• •••••• •••••• •••••• •••••• • •• • •• • •• • •• • •• • •• •• • ••••• •• • ••••• •• • ••••• •• • ••••• •• • ••••• •• • ••••• • Different parameter settings depending on time and day (5 parameter sets) •• •• •• •• •• •• 3O 5O 6O 7O 8O ! ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• • LED color change if speed limit is exceeded •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• ••••••• • Timer and automatic daylight saving time Speed limit function if speed limit is exceeded • Data storage in a ring buffer (exact to the second) • Bidirectional measurement adjustable • Battery level indicator • Bluetooth Smile function • Lightweight and compact aluminum casing • 3-digit high performance LED display with automatic adaption of brightness (digit height 30 cm) • Specially designed protection mask for excellent visibility even under strong sunlight • Extended speed range 1 - 199 kph / mph and decimal point 1,0 - 19,9 kph / mph (optionally) • USB interface for data download, changing parameters or firmware update by USB flash drive (optionally) • Automatic data transfer by email (optionally) Create your own LED texts and graphics with the LED editor. 0682 ! 9 SPEED DISPLAYS AND TRAFFIC STATISTICS EVOLIS SOLUTION This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 1 ELAN CITE, EUROPEAN LEADER OF INNOVATIVE SPEED DISPLAYS Starting 2005, Elan Cité has specialized in speed displays, being a pioneer in France offering this kind of road safety devices. With more than 3,000 sites equiped and 4,000 speed displays installed in France and abroad, Elan Cité is positionned as european leader of speed displays, with numerous foreign distributors and international references. Elan Cité works exclusively with european subcontractors. We are particularly proud to support european industry and generate employement in France and Europe. Elan Cité, linked with the end-users since many years, constantly improves the products with a strong policy of R&D investment, in order to fit technical and economical requirements of the market. This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 2 SPEED DISPLAY EVOLIS SOLUTION Evolis Solution displays detected speed in green/amber/red and up to 5 configurable text or image messages according to detected speed. This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 3 TECHNICAL DATA • Injected ABS resin waterproof casing with integrated hooks • Dimensions H700 x L 709 X P 170mm • Mounting bar : injected ABS resin, mounted on poles with banding straps • Front face : polycarbonate, sealed to the casing with mechanical clip • Waterproof rear location for 2 batteries, USB port, dial selector • Waterproof IP65 (internal pressure from battery handled with a Gore-Tex vent) • Doppler radar antenna : 24,125 Ghz (range 250m, accuracy +/-1 %) • High-brightness Red/amber/green LED display with automatic brightness sensor • Connection with the display for configuration and traffic data processing : USB, Bluetooth, GPRS. • Weight (without battery) : 8kg This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 4 TECHNICAL DATASHEET Radar Antenna Doppler Radar 24,125 Ghz Detection range 10-250 meters Detection angle 17° Accuracy +/- 1 km/h Display LED 3 digits Colors Red/amber/green Size of digits 33 cm Text display 64 x 16 cm (60 x 16 pixels) 1 line of 7 characters 16cm high 2 lines of 10 characters 7cm high Visibility 250m Refresh 1,2 seconds (configurable) Casing Dimensions 700*709*170 mm Casing Injected ABS resin, grey RAL 7035 Front face Polycarbonate Waterproof IP66 Connections USB USB2 Wireless Bluetooth, GPRS Power Supply Battery 12 V / 17 Ah Autonomy 5/10 days Recharge Solar, public lighting, mains This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 5 ADVANCED CONFIGURATION AND STATISTIC ANALYSIS Evocom software, to be downloaded for free, is featured with an user-friendly interface for advanced configuration : specific speed zones, speed steps, anti-record function, text messages, time slots etc... ACTIVABLE OPTIONS All options : • Danger Signal • Bluetooth connection • Statistics • Double-sided statistics can be activated on-site and without a factory return, by entering a software activation key. This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 6 ACCESSORIES In order to fit any type of location and use requirements, Elan Cité offers a range of accessories selected for their simplicity, practicality and robustness. 85 Watts solar panel, including mounting kit for best sunlight exposure : Metallic tripod for ultra-mobile use (one-shot actions at school entrance or special events) : Touchpad 10' with Evocom software pre-installed : This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 7 USER BENEFITS QUICK AND SAFE MOUNTING Thanks to its ultra-light injected ABS resin casing and mounting bar for existing pole, Evolis speed displays can be installed rapidly and at no risk by a sole person. NUMEROUS POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS Evolis speed displays operate with standard 12V/17Ah batteries, recharged either with an external charger, mains/public lighting adaptor, or with a solar panel delivered by Elan Cité. EASY SET-UP Evolis speed displays feature a dial selector for immediate set-up according to pre-set speed zones. Intuitive Evocom software enables advanced configuration. RELIABLE AND RESISTANT IP65 anti-vandalism casing, high brightness LEDs 33 cm digits with automatic brightness sensor, ultre-precise speed detection with 24,125 Ghz doppler... ensure best effect and durability. EASY DATA PROCESSING By connecting via USB or Bluetooth to Evolis, you can directly exploit traffic data and generate charts about amount of incoming and outcoming vehicles, average and maximum speeds, distribution of vehicles by speed range, and easily export data as .xls and .pdf files. HIGH SCALABILITY The later on-site add-on of options (Danger Signal, bluetooth connection, statistics and double-sided statistics) enables the end-user to spread expenses over the time and improve the product with new functionnalities. This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 8 PRICELIST € Price Distributor Price Distributor Public Price 1pc 5pcs SPEED DISPLAY discount 35 % discount 40 % Evolis Solution 1.899 1.235 1.139 ACCESSORIES Tripod 349 227 209 Battery 12V 17 Ah 105 68 63 Adaptor 4Ah 289 188 173 (public lighting / mains) Independant charger 105 68 63 80 Watts solar panel 840 546 504 Touchpad 10' 349 227 209 OPTIONS (activated up-front or on-site) "Danger signal" 199 129 119 Statistics 350 227 210 Double-sided statistics 199 129 119 Bluetooth connection 320 208 192 All prices netto in €/p, ex works Nantes(France) Delivery : 2-4 weeks. Please contact us for shorter delivery times/ bigger order quantities Validity : 3 months ORDERS & INQUIRIES : CALL +33 2 40 16 01 14 EMAIL : [email protected] This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 9 KEY FEATURES • LIGHTWEIGHT AND EASY MOUNTING KIT • ANTI-VANDAL ABS RESIN CASING • LONG-LIFE BATTERIES • RECHARGE VIA SOLAR, MAINS, PUBLIC LIGHTING • 3 DIGITS SPEED DISPLAY 33cm • EASY SET-UP WHEEL BUTTON • USB / BLUETOOTH CONNECTION • ADVANCED PARAMETERS FOR SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION • INTUITIVE SOFTWARE FOR TRAFFIC STATISTICS Elan Cité Technologies 8, Avenue des Thébaudières 44800 ST HERBLAIN, FRANCE Tel : +33 (0)2 40 16 01 14 www.elancite.fr [email protected] This document is confidential and owned by Elan Cité. It cannot be transferred to any third party without prior authorization. 10 Driver Feedback Sign DFS 700 Installation and User Manual Manufacturer and Distributor Bremicker Verkehrstechnik GmbH & Co. KG Am Öferl 37 - 43 D-82362 Weilheim i. OB Phone: +49(0)881 642-0 Fax: +49(0)881 642-201 Email: [email protected] Internet: www.bremicker-vt.de Service Bremicker Verkehrstechnik GmbH & Co. KG Am Öferl 37 - 43 D-82362 Weilheim i. OB Phone: +49(0)881 642-223 Fax: +49(0)881 642-207 Email: [email protected] Internet: www.bremicker-vt.de All rights reserved © Bremicker Verkehrstechnik GmbH & Co. KG, 2012 II Table of Contents Page 1 Notes on this Document .............................................................................. 1-1 2 Safety Tips - Warranty/Liability ................................................................... 2-1 3 Overview of the Device ............................................................................... 3-1 4 Technical Description .................................................................................. 4-1 4.1 Intended use .................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................... 4-1 4.3 Possible applications...................................................................................... 4-4 4.4 Operating modes............................................................................................ 4-5 4.5 Optional equipment ........................................................................................ 4-6 5 Transport and Storage ................................................................................. 5-1 5.1 Transport........................................................................................................ 5-1 5.2 Storage .......................................................................................................... 5-1 6 Preparation and Configuration ................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Overview of first comissioning ........................................................................ 6-1 6.2 Preliminary work on the standard model DFS 700 ......................................... 6-3 6.3 Preliminary work on the DFS 700 with optional accessories .......................... 6-4 6.4 Configuring the DFS 700 with a PC ............................................................... 6-8 6.4.1 Install the DFS-CAS program.................................................................... 6-8 6.4.2 Install USB-device driver for DFS 700....................................................... 6-9 6.4.3 Connect DFS 700 and PC with the USB-cable ....................................... 6-10 6.4.4 Connect the DFS 700 and PC via Bluetooth adapter .............................. 6-11 6.4.5 Connect the DFS 700 and PC via GSM .................................................. 6-12 6.4.6 Set up the DFS 700 with the DFS-CAS program .................................... 6-13 6.5 Configuring the DFS 700 with a PDA ........................................................... 6-25 6.5.1 Install PDA program ................................................................................ 6-25 6.5.2 Set up the DFS 700 via Bluetooth connection......................................... 6-26 7 Installation and Operation ........................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Selecting the installation location for DFS 700 ............................................... 7-1 7.2 Mounting the DFS 700 ................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.1 Standard model DFS 700.......................................................................... 7-2 7.2.2 DFS 700 with Battery- & Mounting Box ..................................................... 7-5 III 7.3 Connecting and switching electrical power .................................................... 7-7 7.3.1 Mains operation with the standard model.................................................. 7-8 7.3.2 Mains operation using Battery- & Mounting Box ....................................... 7-9 7.3.3 Buffered mains operation with Battery and Charger ................................. 7-9 7.3.4 Battery operation with one or two Batteries............................................. 7-11 7.3.5 Power supply to the GSM/GPRS Modem ............................................... 7-12 8 Analysis of Speed Data Measurements ..................................................... 8-1 8.1 Transfering measurements to PC or PDA ...................................................... 8-1 8.2 Assigning measurements to a location........................................................... 8-2 8.3 Viewing measurements .................................................................................. 8-3 8.4 Creating reports ............................................................................................. 8-4 9 Service and Maintenance ............................................................................ 9-1 9.1 Cleaning ......................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 Maintenance .................................................................................................. 9-1 9.3 Symptom / solution table ................................................................................ 9-2 9.4 Diagnostic status check ................................................................................. 9-7 9.5 Firmware update ............................................................................................ 9-8 10 Technical Data ............................................................................................ 10-1 IV 1 Notes on this Document These operating instructions for the DFS 700 Speed Feedback and Warning System are a basis for the faultless operation of the Driver Feedback Sign DFS 700 by the operator. In the operating instructions the equipment is given the abbreviated name DFS 700. The responsible installers and operators must read, understand and follow these operating instructions. Only with knowledge of these operating instructions can errors damage and injury be avoided and fault-free operation assured. The operating instructions are to be kept within easy reach of the DFS 700 and accessible to the operators and maintenance personnel. Bremicker accepts no warranty and no liability for operating faults or damage that arises as a result of failure to follow these operating instructions. Particular subjects are highlighted as follows: Working and operating procedures, which have to be followed exactly so as to exclude life-threatening injuries. Working and operating procedures, which have to be followed exactly so as to exclude danger to persons. Working and operating procedures, which have to be followed exactly so as to damage NOTE to or destruction of the equipment. Technical information to which the equipment operator must pay particular attention. The picture presentations are numbered sequentially per chapter. Some of the figures have legends. References to figures in the text, e.g. (7.1 Item 2), mean: 7.1 = Figure 7.1 Item 2 = Item 2 of the legend to the picture. 1-1 2 Safety Tips - Warranty/Liability Basic Information (1) The DFS 700 has been built in accordance with state-of-the-art technology and recognised safety rules and norms in the EC Guideline. Nevertheless, dangers to the life and limb of the user or a third party, or impairments to the device or other property may occur with its use. (2) Only use the DFS 700 in a technically perfect condition and in accordance with legal provisions, in full awareness of safety and dangers by following the operating instructions! In particular, repair faults that may impair safety immediately yourself or have them repaired by the service company. (3) The DFS 700 is exclusively intended to measure, display and record the speed, measured by the built-in radar equipment, of vehicles passing in front of it. An alternative or more extensive use is deemed to be improper. The manufacturer/supplier is not liable for damages occurring as a result of this. The user alone bears the risk. Proper use also includes following the operating instructions and complying with the service and maintenance conditions. (4) Keep the operating instructions within reach in the place where the device is installed. (5) In addition to the operating instructions, all generally valid legal and other binding regulations governing accident prevention and protection of the environment are to be obeyed and applied! (6) The DFS 700 is to be set up in traffic in accordance with EN 12899-1 “Fixed vertical road traffic signs - Part 1 Fixed Signs”. The equipment must only be mounted on a fixed pole or a solid fixture. (7) Select the setup site such that the work of setting up is not endangered by traffic. If necessary secure the setup site with reflective tapes or warning signs and, where appropriate, work with auxiliary personnel. Only work with approved lifting gear. Where ladders are used, support them. 2-1 (8) The equipment must not extend into the free space of the traffic to be monitored, so it can not impair traffic. (9) The personnel charged with working on the equipment must read these operating instructions and this chapter “Safety Tips” in particular before work begins. This applies most particularly to personnel employed only occasionally, e.g. for connecting the equipment to mains power. (10) Follow the safety advices on the device and keep them in a legible condition. (11) Where safety-relevant changes occur to the equipment, shut it down immediately. Have the fault repaired. (12) Do not make changes, additions and conversions to the equipment unless they are expressly provided for in these operating instructions (e.g. replacing the frame, connecting external flashing lights, etc.). This also applies to the fitting and adjustment of safety devices. (13) Spare parts must meet the technical requirements specified by the manufacturer. Only original original spare parts guarantee this. (14) Only employ trained, properly instructed and authorised personnel. Clearly specify the responsibility of the personnel for operation and assessment. Safety Tips for Operation (15) Refrain from any method of working that puts safety at risk. (16) In the event of functional faults shut the equipment down and secure it. Have faults repaired immediately. (17) Switch the equipment on and off, and monitor control displays as specified in the operating instructions. (18) Lay the mains cable such that it is not under tension or causes obstruction. Nothing should be placed on the cable. (19) Where an earth cable is used, the earth conductor must have a suitable cross-section and connect into a grounding system of safe capacity. (20) For CE compliance please keep attached cables below 3 m length. 2-2 Notes on certain types of danger Electrical power (1) To connect the DFS 700 to the public power supply outdoors, a connection must be available that satisfies the local electrical guidelines and safety requirements. The power supply line phase [brown/black wire] must be secured with a suitable NOTE fuse, typically 4 to 6 A. Otherwise the electronics in the DFS 700 may be damaged or destroyed in case of over-current. When the DFS 700 is in a fixed installation, e.g. to street lights, a disconnectable over-current protective device (max. 6A) according to EN60950 must be installed between the power supply line and the DFS 700. For service work on the DFS 700 the power supply must be disconnected via the over-current protective device. The over-current protective device is to be installed in accordance with the local electrical guidelines and safety requirements. Therefore in Scandinavia, for example, a cut out must have a 2-pole connection against grounding. (2) The electrical connections must always be produced in accordance with the requirements for the intended location. In the case of fixed installations the plug on the power supply unit or the Charger may have to be removed. If the plug is still to be used, then an adequately waterproof, weather-resistant, and properly mounted socket with protection to the power line as specified above is to be provided. (3) Only use fuses of the prescribed rating. In the event of faults in the power supply shut the equipment down immediately. (4) Work on the electrical equipment or fittings (e. g. Charger) must only be carried out by a qualified electrician or by trained personnel under the management and supervision of a qualified electrician in accordance with electrical engineering rules. (5) Parts, on which tests, maintenance and repair are being carried out, must have the power to them disconnected. The disconnected parts must be initially tested for zero voltage then grounded and shorted. Adjacent parts with power still connected to them must be isolated! (6) The electrical equipment on the DFS 700 is to be checked regularly. Defects, such as loose connections or burnt cables, must be removed immediately. 2-3 (7) If work is required on disconnected parts, take a second person along who can trigger a power-down in an emergency. (8) Use only insulated tools! Power Supply Unit Box (if available) (1) As a basic principle the Power Supply Unit box is provided for use on the DFS 700 (on the frame or in the Battery- & Mounting Box), but can also be used separately considering the vertical alignment when placed indoors (workshop, office) or outdoors (next to mounting location). (2) Do not open/disassemble the Power Supply Unit box. Completely replace damaged or non-functioning Power Supply Unit boxes, including the two cables. This also applies to cable damage. Battery (if available) (1) Do not remove the Battery pole caps. A short circuit, which can destroy the Battery, is created by bridging the positive and negative poles with metal. There is a risk of injury as a result of parts heating up or arcing voltages. (2) The Battery cable and poles should be undamaged; otherwise the Battery is to be replaced. (3) As a basic principle charge the Battery used in the Battery- & Mounting Box using the Charger. (4) Only charge and discharge removed Batteries in ventilated areas, as charging causes poisonous and flammable gases to develop. No Smoking! Keep children away! (5) Do not cover the Battery and do not place on radiators, heaters or open fires. Avoid contact with water. The optional Battery- & Mounting Box is the best location for the Battery while NOTE charging and in use. 2-4 (2) The Battery fluid is corrosive! On contact with skin, the eyes or clothing, wash the area affected in plenty of water. On physical contact consult a doctor (contact with sulphuric acid). (3) The Battery must be recycled or properly disposed of. Disposing of the Battery in domestic waste is prohibited. (4) The Battery may not be beaten, disassembled, damaged, dumped or burned in an open fire. The danger of an explosion otherwise exists. (5) Only transport Batteries wearing eye protection and acid-resistant gloves. (6) Only work on Batteries wearing eye protection and protective clothing. Battery Charger (if available) (1) The Battery Charger is exclusively approved for charging the DFS 700 Battery. (2) As a basic principle the Charger is provided for indoor use (workshop, office) but inside the Battery- & Mounting Box it can also be used outdoors. To avoid overheating, do not cover the Charger during a charging cycle. (3) The epoxy resin-filled Charger is spray-proof, but must not be immersed in water for long periods (IP67). (4) The mains socket or a power disconnect must be easily accessible. If an operating fault occurs, remove the plug from the socket immediately or disconnect the power. (5) Hazardous voltages exist inside the Charger. Do not open/dismantle the Charger. Avoid damage. (6) The charging cycle can cause explosive gases to develop. Avoid sparks and open flames. Ensure there is adequate ventilation during a charging cycle. The Charger may not be used in the immediate vicinity of combustible anaesthetic gases. The plastic casing should not come into contact with oil or grease etc., as it can be dissolved by chemicals and solvents. The optional Battery- & Mounting Box is the best location for the Charger while NOTE charging and in use. 2-5 Radar (1) The radar beam may be damaging to the eyes. Do not look directly into radar radiation! Return and Waste-Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Devices and Batteries (1) Please contact the Customer Service about the free return of electrical and electronic devices and their components in accordance with WEEE Guideline 2002/96 EC. (2) Old Batteries are to be returned to the distributor or to a public waste-disposal facility. Warranty All warranty and liability matters regarding the DFS 700 are defined by the current sales contractual conditions, provided that legal regulations don't state otherwise. Damages caused by improper installation or operation or as a result of excessive operational demands or the use of unsuitable product components is excluded from any kind of warranty and liability in all cases. The equipment must only be used by properly trained persons. Otherwise the NOTE warranty according to the delivery terms and conditions expires immediately. Device Identification The type label bearing the CE mark is located on the rear of the speed display device. The type label gives the following information: Manufacturer’s details Device type Serial number Electrical data. 2-6 8 3 Overview of the Device 6 6 9 7 3 11 8 1 12 8 10 15 2 13 6 14 DFS 700 3 4 15 5 Figure 3-1 Overall View DFS 700 1 Frame with reflective coating (Diamond Grade, white) 2 Sensor to measure environmental brightness 3 Speed-display device 4 Radar sensor 5 LED-display bar, red and green-coloured 6 Mounting brackets, top and bottom (shorter), with fixing cuffs and bolts 7 Power Supply Unit box 230 V with mounting plate (optional accessory) 8 Ventilation fittings 9 Rotary hinge for attachment to the optional Battery- & Mounting Box. 10 Bolts for lock on the optional Battery- & Mounting Box. 11 Top service cover 12 Bottom service cover 13 12 V connection cable for DFS 700 power supply from the Power Supply Unit box. 14 Mains connector cable 230 V (see Safety Provisions Section 2) 15 Identification label 3-1 Delivery package 4 5 6 2 1 3 Figure 3-2 DFS 700 delivery package In the standard model the DFS 700 comprises the following parts: 1 Speed-display device 2 Frame (pre-mounted on the display unit) 3 Mounting brackets with fixing cuff and bolts; 2 sets (bottom is shorter) 4 Software CD with DFS-CAS program for PC and PDA and this manual 5 Bluetooth Adapter with USB 2.0-plug, CD with Bluetooth driver and operating instructions 6 USB-connector cable On delivery, please check for completeness and condition of parts. In the event of complaints, please contact the Customer Services. 3-2 Optional accessories for the DFS 700 4 1 4A 4C 4D 4B 2 6 3 5 Figure 3-3 Optional accessories for the DFS 700 1 Battery- & Mounting Box 2 Battery 12 V, 17Ah with cable 3 Battery Charger with mounting set and operating instructions, 12 V charging cable and mains connector cable 230 V (see Safety Provisions Section 2) 4 GSM/GPRS Modem with mounting set 4A GSM-Antenna 4B SIM-card insert 4C Connector for GSM-data cable 4D Connector for GSM power supply cable 5 EU-Universal plug for connecting the Battery Charger (only indoors!) 6 Power Supply Unit box with mounting plate, 12 V power chord for DFS 700 and mains connector cable 230 V (see Safety Provisions Section 2) 3-3 4 Technical Description 4.1 Intended use The DFS 700 (Figure 3-1) is used to measure and display the speeds of vehicles driving into the radar beam. These measurements are displayed to the vehicle, recorded and can be evaluated statistically by the user program DFS-CAS. The monitoring of traffic speeds in flowing traffic is particularly usefull for the following traffic zones: Traffic zones with particular speed limits; e.g. residential areas, inner-city areas and building sites. Dangerous traffic spots, such as curves, bridges and tunnels. Traffic zones that have to be driven carefully, e.g. in front of hospitals, schools, bus-stops, streets with surfaces that are dirty or produce noise. The spray-protected DFS 700 can be used outdoors permanently independent of weather given the appropriate power supply. As a result of the reflective sheet on the frame (Figure 3-1 Item 1) the DFS 700 can be easily spotted by drivers during the day and especially in the dark due to reflection from the vehicle's headlamps. If necessary, additional information can be attached to the reflective area of the frame (Figure 3-1 Item 1). 4.2 Functionality In the ready-to-use state (power supply created, switched on and initial settings made by the user program DFS-CAS), the radar sensor (Figure 3-1 Item 4) measures the speed of an approaching vehicle. The radar sensor (Figure 3-1 Item 4) is located in the lower field of the central figure. In normal operation the vehicle’s speed is displayed in LED-digits (Figure 3-1 Item 5) on the speed display (Figure 3-1 Item 3). The colour of the digits can be set to green or red. As a rule, speeds set as permissible are displayed in green, speeds exceeding the speed limit in red. The LED-digits adapt their intensity to the ambient light conditions. 4-1 A corresponding light sensor (Figure 3-1 Item 2) is located in the upper field of the central figure. With two independent thresholds the display can also be set to flashing and an additional external device, e.g. a flashing warning light, can be switched on for an additional warning The speed-display unit can store up to 100,000 measurements. If the memory is full additional measurements will overwrite the oldest measurements first. All the settings for operation of the speed-display unit are made using the DFS-CAS user program. The DFS-CAS user program can be installed on a PC running the Windows XP/2000 operating system and/or on a PDA running Windows Mobile 5.0. The connection from the display unit to the PC is created using the USB-cable supplied (Figure 3-2 Item 7) or, after activating the supplied Bluetooth adapter (Figure 3-2 Item 6) on the PC by wireless connection. A Bluetooth-capable PDA can also be connected wireless to the display unit. Where the optional GSM-Modem (Figure 3-3 Item 4) is used, additional radio communication is possible via the GSM network (mobile communication). To that end a modem is needed in the PC and a GSM-SIM-card (Figure 3-3 Item 4B) is required in the GSM-modem (see also 4.5). The speed display unit has a 2 1/2 LED digital display, which can display the maximum value 199. It comprises a total of 27 light segments homogenously tuned to each other (13 segments per number, 1 segment for the leading 1). Under optimum environmental conditions the digits can be read at a distance of over 100 m. The operating elements and electrical connections (see Figure 4-1) are located on the back of the speed display unit under a two-part service cover (Figure 3-1 Items 11 and 12). The connected cables are held in place by a foam rubber seal after the service covers are in place. The speed display unit has passive internal ventilation provided by two add-on vents (Figure 3-1 Item 8). The vents must always be kept uncovered. 4-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9 Figure 4-1 Operating elements and electrical connections 1Buffer battery for real-time clock 2Plug connector for power to the GSM/GPRS Modem 3Plug connector for externally controllable device (e.g. flashing warning light) 4USB-plug connector 5RS 232 plug connector for GSM/GPRS Modem data cable 6Flat fuse 4A delay action 7Grounding bolts for connecting to a ground cable or a protective cable 8DFS 700 on/off main-switch 9Plug connector for optional 12V power from the 230 V Power Supply Unit box or second optional Battery (is not powered by the Battery Charger) 10 Plug connector for the first optional Battery (is powered by the Battery Charger) 11 Plug connector for optional Battery Charger 4-3 The speed display unit (Figure 3-1 Item 2) is attached to the frame with screws (Figure 3-1 Item 1). Its breakthrough on the front of the display unit is sealed with black silicone. The frame can be changed if desired. To that end, eight securing bolts on the speed display unit casing are to be unscrewed and the silicone seal broken. The new frame is to be bolted through the same holes and should be sealed with black silicone again. The optional 230V Power Supply Unit box (Figure 3-1 Item 7) establishes the power supply between the mains connection (100 V - 240 V) and the speed display unit (12 V) via its two cables. The box is maintenance-free, weather-tight and not to be opened. The two add-on vents (Figure 3-1 Item 8) must always be kept free. As a basic principle, the Power Supply Unit box is to be mounted on its mounting plate above the speed display unit on the frame. If required, however, the Power Supply Unit box can also be set up separately considering the vertical alignment. The DFS 700 is mounted on a 60 mm pole via the mounting brackets (Figure 3-1 Item 6). 4.3 Possible applications The DFS 700 can be used in its standard model and with the optional accessory fittings using different possible power supplies. NOTE Follow installation advices and electrical connections as specified in Section 6! Fixed installation with permanent power supply (mains operation) The standard model of the DFS 700 is used in a fixed location and is connected to the public electricity supply through the Power Supply Unit. Additionally the optional Battery- & Mounting Box can be used for this kind of installation. Fixed installation with Battery and mains power supply (Battery buffer mode) The DFS 700 can be operated with the Battery and the Charger in the Battery- & Mounting Box. In case the power supply is switched off or fails the equipment is still powered by the Battery. The Charger recharges the Battery when the power supply is switched on again. Independent Installation (Battery mode) The DFS 700 can be powered with one or two Batteries in the Battery- & Mounting Box independent of public power supply. Alternatively, it can also be powered by solar power, however this is not included in the delivery package of the DFS 700 and must be obtained from other suppliers. Customer-specific Design After removing the frame (Figure 3-1 Item 1) the speed display unit can be fitted into other frames or cases, which are equivalent to the original parts in terms of quality (weatherproofness, ventilation). 4-4 4.4 Operating modes Various modes can be set in the DFS 700 using the user program. The preset red/green colour change, flashing setting and activation settings for externally connected equipment are taken into consideration in every mode. The measured speeds are recorded in all operating modes except for the standby mode. The speeds to be displayed can be limited such that very slow speeds (e.g. cyclists) or very high speeds (to avoid abuse) are not displayed. All modes can be time-scheduled to switch automatically to standby mode and back using a user-defined switching program, so as to reduce power consumption in periods of low-traffic density or low-relevance. Standby Mode The DFS 700 operates with minimum power consumption, which only allows the equipment to be configured using the user program. Radar and Display are inactive. Radar Mode The speeds of approaching vehicles are measured and displayed and the speed data is stored. Limit Mode Like Radar Mode with the difference that a user-defined speed limit value is displayed to approaching vehicles. Covert Mode The speeds of approaching vehicles are measured and the data is stored, but nothing is displayed. This mode enables driven speeds to be collected and assessed without influencing traffic with a visible display. Demo Mode The LED display shows a sequence of digits with changing red/green colours, varying brightness and flashing frequency to test the quality and capabilities of the display presentation. 4-5 4.5 Optional equipment Power Supply Unit Box The 230 V power supply unit box (Figure 3-3 Item 6) provides the power supply via its two cables between the mains connection (100 V - 240 V) and the DFS 700 (12 V). The box is maintenance-free and waterproof and is not to be opened. The vents must always be kept clear. In principle the power supply unit box is to be mounted on the back of the DFS 700. See Section 6. If required, the power supply unit box may also be installed separately, taking into account the vertical alignment. Battery The 12 V, 17 Ah Battery (Figure 3-3 Item 2) specially for the DFS 700 is a gel-filled lead Battery. A cable with a suitable plug is mounted on the Battery poles for connection to the DFS. Battery and cable are a fixed unit. Using the Battery mains independent operation is possible. The voltage management system of the DFS 700 cuts the DFS 700 off from the Battery at a voltage under 10.8 V so as to avoid deep discharge. If the optional GSM/GRPS-modem is fitted and active, an error message concerning the imminent low Battery level is sent by SMS to the specified recipient. The Battery is safely housed and protected from weather in the optional Battery- & Mounting Box (Figure 3-3 Item 1). For separate setup without the Battery- & Mounting Box the Battery must be given special protection from weather and unauthorised access (see Section 2). NOTE Using Batteries from other manufacturers but with the same performance data is acceptable. However, 3M will not accept liability for the correct operation of the DFS 700. In any case only the Bremicker Battery Charger may be used to charge the Batteries through the DFS 700. Two identical Batteries can be used to operate the DFS 700; both of them are to be connected to the speed display unit. The DFS 700 voltage management system will regulate the power supply from the two batteries and make sure that both are used equally. 4-6 Battery Charger The Battery Charger (Figure 3-3 Item 3) specially for the DFS 700 is only intended to charge the DFS 700 Battery. A cable with a suitable plug for connection to the speed display unit is mounted on the Battery Charger. Where the Battery Charger is used, buffered mains operation of the DFS 700 is possible. Therefore a Battery and the optional Battery- & Mounting Box must both be used (Figure 3-3 Item 1). The Battery is charged by the Charger connected to the mains even if the DFS 700 is switched off, provided that both the Battery and the Charger are connected to the DFS 700. For compliance with CE Regulations for fixed installations, where the Charger is connected to the public mains network, a frequency filter has to be used in the supply line. Following types can be used: 1. Schurter 5500.2034 FMLB-0109-2040 2. Schurter 5500.2043 FMW2-52-2/1.25 GSM/GPRS-Modem The GSM/GPRS Modem (Figure 3-3 Item 4) specially for the DFS 700 is a mobile communication modem for transmissions over any distance. An activated SIM card with data services (Circuit Switched Data Services) is required for mobile communication to the DFS 700. Figure 4-2 GSM SIM card This SIM card must be obtained from a local GSM supplier. The following advices should be followed for fault-free operation. If possible, do not use prepaid cards! The prepaid credit can run out after a certain period. The card then has to be removed from the GSM Modem for recharging. An unambiguous call number must be allocated to the data service. In the case of cards having several services, the data service must have its own call number specified for it. Before using the GSM Modem for the first time, the PIN number should be noted and kept in a safe place as it will be used again later. Alternatively, PIN-number polling in the SIM card can be deactivated. 4-7 In the active state the modem transmits error messages/faults to the specified recipient by SMS. The activated GSM Modem also represents a alternative connection possiblity to USB or Bluetooth connections for using the same functions of the software (download data, diagnostics, etc.). For mobile communication a modem must also be installed in the PC for dialling into the DFS 700. Telephone connection Modem Telephone cable Figure 4-3 GSM-connection from PC to DFS 700 The GSM/GRPS Modem is supposed to be installed into the Battery- & Mounting Box since it provides particular protection for the modem. It can also be installed in a casing with the same characteristics and at least the same quality. 4-8 Battery- & Mounting Box The Battery- & Mounting Box (Figure 3-3 Item 1) for the DFS 700 is used to store the optional accessories safely and weatherproof and to mount the device on vertical poles 60 to 140 mm in diameter. Two hinges are located on the box (Figure 4-4 Item 3), into which the frame of the DFS 700 is suspended. After closing the DFS in front of the Battery- & Mounting Box, the case can be locked with a key (Figure 4-4 Item 5). Interior ventilation is provided by the two vents in the rear wall. The vents must not be covered and must always be kept open. The Batteries can be placed on the two trays (Figure 4-4 Item 4). Fixings and bolt threads are already in place on the back for attaching the GSM/GPRS Modem (Figure 4-5 Item 2), the Battery Charger (Figure 4-5 Item 3) and the Power Supply Unit box (Figure 4-5 Item 6). 1 2 5 4 3 6 x4 3 Figure 4-4 Battery- & Mounting Box 4 1 Clamping frame 2 Cover for GSM antenna 3 Hinges for DFS 700 4 Trays for Batteries 5 Key lock 6 Attachment bolts for the clamping frame 4-9 On the top of the box there is a sealed cover for the GSM antenna (Figure 4-5 Item 1). On the bottom of the box openings have been prepared, into which a PG gasket can be inserted if necessary for safe and tight guiding of the cables of the Power Supply Unit box (Figure 4-5 Item 6) or Battery Charger (Figure 4-5 Item 3). 1 7 x2 2 3 6 4 Figure 4-5 Positions of accessories and components 1 Opening for GSM antenna 5 5 2 GSM/GPRS-Modem 3 Space for Battery Charger 4 Battery 5 Openings for PG screwed joints 6 Power Supply Unit box or Battery 7 Ventilation opening Only a qualified electrician may carry out this work! Risk of injury as a result of electric shock! The Battery- & Mounting Box is attached to a holding pole by the clamping frame (Figure 4-4 Item 1) which is fixed tight to the box by four bolts. 4-10 5 Transport and Storage 5.1 Transport For transporting the DFS 700, switched off and disconnected from the mains, and the accessories the original packaging should always be used. If the DFS 700 and the Battery- & Mounting Box are to be transported already assembled, a break-proof and weatherproof packing should be made for this unit. In addition, the front of the frame is to be protected by a soft cover. For transport all outward-leading cables are to be laid such that they cannot hang loose. The Battery must be removed from the Battery- & Mounting Box prior to transport and packed separately. Follow safety advices on handling the Battery, see Section 2. During transport do not hit the parts or subject them to strong vibration. 5.2 Storage The DFS and its accessories, switched off and disconnected from the mains, can be stored for up to 12 months at an ambient temperature of 20°C to 30°C and 55% relative humidity in a dry room. Follow safety advices on storage of Batteries, see Section 2. 5-1 6 Preparation and Configuration 6.1 Overview of first comissioning These images show the sequence of the first use up to operation of the standard model DFS 700 (Figure 6-1) and DFS 700 with optional accessories (Figure 6-2) in simplified form. The individual working steps are listed and explained in detail in the following sections. Preliminaries 1 USB Driver PC USB Pow er Configuration with PC 2 CD DFS-CAS Bluetooth Window s 2000/XP Driver Bluetooth or/and Pow er PC Configuration CD with PC and PDA 2 DFS-CAS Window s Mobile USB PDA PDA Pow er Operation 3 Figure 6-1 Commissioning DFS 700 standard model 6-1 Preliminaries 1 USB Driver USB Power Configuration with PC 2 Bluetooth PC Driver Bluetooth CD DFS-CAS Windows 2000/XP Power GSM or/and Telephone Power PC Configuration CD with PC and PDA 2 DFS-CAS Windows Mobile USB PDA PDA Power Operation 3 Figure 6-2 Commissioning DFS 700 with optional accessories 6-2 6.2 Preliminary work on the standard model DFS 700 (1) Push the two clamps (Figure 6-3 Item 2) of the mounting brackets (Figure 6-3 Item 4) into the frame (Figure 6-3 Item 1) on the top and bottom side in each case. Use the longer one on the top. (2) Tighten the four hexagonal nuts fully (Figure 6-3 Item 3) and check if the mounting bracket is seated securely. (3) Set the fixing plate (Figure 6-3 Item 5) of the optional Power Supply Unit box (Figure 6-3 Item 6) centrally in the frame on the top side and insert the two clamps (Figure 6-3 Item 7). (4) Tighten the two hexagonal nuts fully (Figure 6-3 Item 8) and check if the Power Supply Unit box is seated securely. If required, the Power Supply Unit box can also be set up separately keeping the same vertical alignment. 2 3 2 4 3 1 7 x2 8 x2 5 2 6 3 2 4 3 Figure 6-3 Attachment of the mounting brackets and Power Supply Unit box 6-3 6.3 Preliminary work on the DFS 700 with optional accessories Fitting the 230V Power Supply Unit box into Battery- & Mounting Box Where the Battery- & Mounting Box is available, the Power Supply Unit box (Figure 6-4 Item 1) can be fitted into the Battery- & Mounting Box instead of connecting it to the frame. (1) Push the Power Supply Unit box with the free mounting plate holes (Figure 6-4 Item 3) onto the two bolt threads (Figure 6-4 Item 4) on the left in the Battery- & Mounting Box and tighten fully with two M4 hexagonal bolts (Figure 6-4 Item 2). 4 3 2 x2 1 5 Figure 6-4 Fitting the Power Supply Unit box (2) Create an opening in the base of the Battery- & Mounting Box for the power cable (Figure 6-4 Item 5) and pull the power cable through the opening, which should be sealed with a PG-seal. Only qualified electricians are allowed to carry out this work, see safety advice in section 2. Risk of injury from electric shock in case of unqualified assembly! 6-4 Fitting the Battery Charger into the Battery- & Mounting Box (1) Push the Battery Charger with the holes for the two attachment clips (Figure 6-5 Item 2) onto the two bolt threads (Figure 6-5 Item 3) on the right in the centre of the Battery- & Mounting Box and tighten fully with two M4 hexagonal bolts (Figure 6-4 Item 1). (2) Create an opening in the base of the Battery- & Mounting Box for the power cable (Figure 6-5 Item 4) and pull the power cable through the opening, which should be sealed with a PG-seal. Only qualified electricians are allowed to carry out this work, see safety advice in section 2. Risk of injury from electric shock in case of unqualified assembly! 3 1x2 2 4 Figure 6-5 Fitting the Battery Charger 6-5 Fit the GSM/GPRS Modem into the Battery- & Mounting Box The parts to be mounted can be found in the delivery package for the GSM/GPRS Modem. (1) Push one spacer ring (Figure 6-6 Item 5) onto the two bolt threads (Figure 6-6 Item 6) on the top right in the Battery- & Mounting Box. (2) Then push the plastic cover (Figure 6-6 Item 3) with the angled part upwards on the bolt threads and again push on a spacer ring (Figure 6-6 Item. 4). The cover protects the GSM Modem from dripping condensed water. (3) On the GSM/GPRS Modem (Figure 6-6 Item 10) insert the clips (Figure 6-6 Item 2) into the rear rail from both sides and adjust the spacing so that the GSM/GPRS Modem can be seated on the two bolt threads. The antenna connection (Figure 6-6 Item 16) must point to the left. Fix the GSM Modem in place with two M4-fixing screws (4) Push the GSM antenna (Figure 6-6 Item 7) and antenna cable with the plug facing forward through the hole in the top of the Battery- & Mounting Box and thread the washer (Figure 6-6 Item 8) and hexagonal nut (Figure 6-6 Item 9) onto the antenna cable. 7 6 8 3 9 13 4 x2 5 x2 1 2 16 12 14 15 11 10 2 1 Figure 6-6 Fitting the GSM/GPRS Modem 6-6 (5) Tighten the antenna head (Figure 6-6 Item 7) from inside with the hexagonal nut (Figure 6-6 Item 9). Ensure that the washer (Figure 6-6 Item 8) fully covers the hole from the inside. (6) Screw the antenna cable tightly to the antenna connection (Figure 6-6 Item 13). (7) Screw the data cable (Figure 6-6 Item 12) to the RS 232 interface (Figure 6-6 Item 14). (8) Plug the power cable to the DFS 700 into the socket (Figure 6-6 Item 15). (9) Collect excess cable and tie off with cable ties. (10) Insert an activated GSM data SIM card into the SIM card holder (Figure 6-6 Item 16) in the GSM/GPRS Modem and lock it. NOTE See Section 4.5 for information on the SIM card to be used. 6-7 6.4 Configuring the DFS 700 with a PC All settings on the DFS 700 are made using the supplied DFS-CAS PC program. This program is used to perform configuration and data analysis. Furthermore, diagnostic info and traffic data can also be retrieved. 6.4.1 Install the DFS-CAS program Minimum requirements PC with Intel Pentium III processor 256 MB RAM memory Display-/ Monitor resolution 1024x768 CD-ROM drive USB (or Bluetooth) port 50 MB free disk space Windows 2000 SP4 or Windows XP SP2 operating system Internet Explorer 5.0. Installation (1) Insert the program CD in the drive - the Setup program starts automatically. (2) Select “Install DFS-CAS for Windows“ or select “Start” then “Run” from the Windows taskbar and enter the path to the CD ROM drive and the setup program file name, e.g. “d:\setup.exe”, to open it (3) Click “OK” to confirm. The program is installed, in doing so follow the installation instructions. (4) Once installation is complete the program can be started by the new symbol on the desktop or by selecting it via the “Programs” menu. (5) After the first start a window appears (Figure 6-7), in which the path for the data folder and the desired language can be selected in advance. 6-8 english Figure 6-7 Path for Data Folder and Language selection For the first installation the suggested data folder should be accepted because example data sets have been placed in it. The directory can be changed at any time (6) If necessary the program can be uninstalled again by choosing “Settings”, “Control Panel”, then “Software” and then following the uninstall instructions. 6.4.2 Install USB-device driver for DFS 700 For the DFS 700 to communicate with the PC, the USB-driver for the DFS 700 must be installed on the PC. The driver is also on the DFS-CAS program CD. (1) Insert the program CD in the drive - the Setup program will start automatically. (2) Install “Install USB-Driver“ or select “Start” then “Run” from the Windows taskbar and enter the path to the CD ROM drive and the program start file, e.g. “d:\USB\PDInst.exe” in the “Run” window. (3) Click “OK” to confirm. The USB-driver is installed, in doing so follow the installation instructions and, when asked, connect the DFS, which needs to be switched on. Alternatively, the USB-driver can be installed using the "Assistant for searching new Hardware", which should start automatically in Windows after the DFS is connected to the PC with the USB-cable. Thereby, follow the instructions and specify the drive containing the Program CD as the search location for the USB-driver. Questions regarding the type of the new hardware should be answered with "Com-Port". 6-9 6.4.3 Connect DFS 700 and PC with the USB-cable (1) Unscrew the two service covers on the DFS 700, see Figure 3-1. (2) Insert the DFS power cable (Figure 6-8 Item 4) from the Power Supply Unit box (Figure 6-8 Item 1) into the right-hand plug (Figure 6-8 Item 5). (3) Connect the mains cable (Figure 6-8 Item. 3) to the mains. (4) Switch on the DFS 700 at the main switch (Figure 6-8 Item 6). After switching the DFS 700 on it performs a short self-check followed by the display of two horizontal bars "- -" as confirmation. In case of issues the display will show one of the codes explained in Section 9.4. (5) Insert the rectangular plug of the USB-cable (Figure 6-8 Item 7) into the USB-socket (Figure 6-8 Item 2). (6) Insert the USB-cable with the flat plug into the USB-interface - the USB-connection is now made and the PC recognises the DFS 700. 1 2 3 Power PC 5 4 6 7 Figure 6-8 USB-connection to the DFS 700 6-10 6.4.4 Connect the DFS 700 and PC via Bluetooth adapter (1) Insert the Bluetooth adapter into the USB 2.0 interface of your PC. (2) Install the Bluetooth adapter from the supplied driver CD. Alternatively, install using the Hardware Assistant and enter the drive containing the Bluetooth adapter’s driver CD as the search location. (3) After installation the Bluetooth symbol with a stylised “B” on a blue background appears in the Windows taskbar. (4) Right-click with the mouse on the Bluetooth symbol and have the Bluetooth environment searched. Switched-on DFS units within radio range (up to a maximum of 20 m) are displayed. The device IDs begin with “DFS…” followed by the serial number of the DFS. Search Bluetooth environment DFSAA09580906 (5) Right-click with the mouse on the device symbol and create a paired connection. The Bluetooth PIN of the DFS unit is initially "0000“ (for security reasons change it later! see Section 6.4.6). If successful, a red check symbol appears next to the device symbol. Create paired connection The paired connection remains permanent and only has to be renewed if the Bluetooth PIN changes or either the PC or the DFS breaks the paired connection. (6) Right-click with the mouse on the device symbol and select the serial port as the connection. Green arrows appear and the COM Port of the virtual serial connection is given. Connect serial port (7) Select Bluetooth instead of USB in the DFS-CAS connections (see Figure 6-12) and select the COM port given in the previous step in the corresponding connection settings (see Figure 6-13). (8) All other steps to communicate with and configure the DFS 700 are to be carried out as described in Section 6.4.6. 6-11 6.4.5 Connect the DFS 700 and PC via GSM (1) Connect a modem to the PC and then connect the modem to a suitable telecommunication line (e.g. analogue or ISDN) (2) Connect the optional GSM Modem to the DFS 700 (see Section 6.3) and insert a GSM data SIM card (see Section 4.5). (3) Select a connection for the modem connected to the PC in the DFS-CAS connections (see Figure 6-12). (4) In the modem’s connection settings select the COM port. In the “Dial prefix” field enter the number to dial out immediately after the dial command character sequence (e.g. "atd“ followed by “0”). Figure 6-9 Connection settings for modem (5) All other steps to communicate with and configure the DFS 700 are to be carried out as described in Section 6.4.6. As part of this, a dial-in number must be entered in the DFS list for the DFS to be dialled (see Figure 6-14) without using special characters (+/-) or the national dial prefix. Modem communication includes a dial-in process, which can be observed on the “COM Monitor”. If the dial-in process is not correctly executed, the connection settings to the PC for the modem may have to be modified in accordance with the modem's manual. For support please contact the manufacturer of the modem in the PC. 6-12 6.4.6 Set up the DFS 700 with the DFS-CAS program The DFS-CAS program has a help function, which can be called via the “F1” key or the “?” in the menu bar. The help subjects aid with installation, the configuration of the DFS and analysis of speed data. (1) Open the DFS-CAS program by clicking on the DFS-CAS symbol on the desktop or via the “Start”, “Programs” menu and then selecting “DFS-CAS”. After the start-up screen the main screen containing the “DFS list” and the “Location list” appears. DFS list Location list Figure 6-10 DFS list and Location list (2) Open the “Options”/”General” window via “Settings”. Here, several general parameters can be set as required. A text, which then appears on all printout pages, can be entered in “Caption for printout”. A path to your own Logo in wmf (Windows Meta File) format, which then appears on the graphical printouts can be entered in “Logo for chart printout”. The units and speed measurements to be used for creating reports can be selected. When selecting another language the DFS-CAS program has to be restarted to display the new language setting. 6-13 Figure 6-11 General DFS-CAS options (3) Open the “DFS-CAS connections” window via “Settings”, select the USB connection and select “Edit”. Figure 6-12 DFS-CAS connections (4) Select the COM port to which the USB-cable is connected in the “DFS-CAS connection parameters” window. The correct COM port can only be selected if the DFS is switched on and connected to the PC’s USB port. The COM port may possibly change at the next use. 6-14 COM15 (VCP0) Figure 6-13 DFS-CAS connection parameters (5) Add the connected DFS 700 as a new DFS to the DFS list (Figure 6-10) via the “Add/Edit DFS” command and make the required entries. The DFS ID has to be specified by the user and must be different from any other entries in the DFS list. If a GSM Modem is used, the data service call number of the GSM SIM card is to be entered in the “Dial number” field (see Section 4.5). In doing so, only use digits and not special characters (+/-), and also omit the national dial prefix if calling from the same country. Figure 6-14 Add/Edit DFS 6-15 Then create the first intended location for this DFS 700 by using the “Add/Edit location” command from the Location list and make the required entries. The location name has to be specified by the user and must be different from any other locations in the Location list. Figure 6-15 Add/Edit location (6) Open the window “Parameter Source” using the command "DFS Parameters" for the DFS selected in the DFS list. Select the option shown in the Figure below. Figure 6-16 Parameter source 6-16 On selecting “Next” the “COM Monitor” window opens and displays the communication progress. Then another window “Configuration parameters” opens. Figure 6-17 Configuration parameters and COM Monitor (7) The “Configuration parameters” window contains five tab segments “General” “Display” “Operating Mode” “Radar“ “Wireless Communication”, where the parameters are to be user defined in sequence. The data and names of the input fields are self-explanatory. Selection elements with preset texts can be changed by clicking on them. Commands, which cannot be performed in the respective window, are shown in grey. Active commands are shown in black. After the modification the settings can be transferred to the DFS 700 via the buttons “Transmit all parameters” and “Transmit modified parameters”. 6-17 (8) The DFS 700 system time can be set or synchronised with the PC time in the “General” tab. The time can only be changed if this does not affect existing traffic data entries. Data may have to be downloaded and erased before the time can be changed. Figure 6-18 General 6-18 (9) The display parameters can be modified in the “Display” tab. The parameters are explained below. Figure 6-19 Display Units for DFS display Unit setting for displaying the speed in km/h (kilometres per hour) or mph (miles per hour). May be different from the setting for data analysis in the program options. Measure and log speeds from - to Enter the speeds between which the DFS 700 measures and records. Speeds above and below the set range are not measured and not stored. Display Green / Red from - to Enter the speeds between which the digital displays in green / red. Both colour ranges are fully independent of each other. If the ranges overlap, green and red are displayed simultaneously and produce orange. In ranges for which no colour has been set, the display remains off. 6-19 To prevent abuse like intentional speeeding, the colour ranges should be set such that no display occurs above a specific speed. Measurements will still be stored if they are within the defined measurement range Start flashing above Speed above which the digital display also flashes Frequency on/off Flashing on- and off-time intervals in tenths of a second Activate switchgear above Speed above which an externally controlled unit, e.g. flashing warning light, is switched on Show this in speed limit mode Speed value to be displayed in the “Speed Limit” mode (e.g. the maximum permissible speed) In order to display the speed limit only above a certain speed the colour range has to be set accordingly. For example, if the unit is supposed to display a red 50 above speeds of 55 km/h, then the following settings are suitable: - Measure from 3 to 198 (measure and store all) - Green from 199 to 199 (is never displayed!) - Red from 55 to 199 (activate red above 55 km/h) - Display in speed-limit mode 50 (display 50) Green / Red brightness range from - to The minimum and maximum brightness limits for display of the green/red LED’s dependent on ambient light or selection of the presets "Economic", "Normal" and "Intense". Within these limits the DFS adapts the brightness of the display to the ambient light, whereby 255 stands for 100% brightness. At daytime the brightness will be at maximum and at night at minimum. 6-20 (10) The operating mode can be selected in the “Operating Mode” tab (see also Section 4.4) and times for automatic switching between the selected mode and the Standby mode can be scheduled Figure 6-20 Operating Mode The following modes are possible (see also Section 4.4): Standby Mode Communication only Radar Mode Display the currently measured speed Covert Mode Store the speed only. No display Limit Mode Display a fixed value (e.g. speed limit) Demo Mode Display random numbers All 27 possible switching programs are deactivated on delivery and can be configured as required. Thereby, days, times and change to Standby mode or the selected mode can be defined. In case no switching time is defined and activated the DFS will always be working in the selected mode. 6-21 (11) The radar sensitivity can be set as required in the “Radar” tab. The maximum setting (255) is advisable. Reducing the sensitivity is only recommended in the case of faulty measurements caused by adverse ambient conditions. Figure 6-21 Radar 6-22 (12) Device-based settings regarding Bluetooth and GSM communication can be changed in the “Wireless Communications” tab. Figure 6-22 Wireless Communication Bluetooth Pin The 4-digit PIN under which the DFS 700 allows paired connections to be made by other Bluetooth devices (PC, PDA). If necessary, all paired device connections previously authorised by the DFS can be cut again. The Bluetooth PIN is “0000” on delivery and should be changed for security (can only be done via USB connection). Write the new PIN down and keep it in a safe place. If the new PIN is lost, it can be reset to “0000” by restoring the DFS to the factory settings. GSM Modem PIN on the DFS The PIN number of the data SIM-card, which has to be inserted in the optional GSM Modem, if available (see Section 4.5). If the wrong PIN is entered the SIM-card will be locked after switching on the DFS several times. The SIM-card then has to be removed from the DFS and manually unlocked with the PUK code. 6-23 Number for SMS Message Mobile phone number to which the SMS messages are to be sent. This only functions if the optional GSM Modem is available and a data SIM-card is inserted (see Section 4.5). The following messages are sent in English text: Battery almost empty Data memory almost full Data memory full. Oldest traffic data will be overwritten Battery of real-time clock empty Status code in the event of issues (Self-test every 24 hours, see chapter 9.4) SMS Service Centre Enter the SMS Service Centre call number of the mobile-phone operator who supplied the data SIM-card (see Section 4.5) (13) The DFS 700 is now ready for use. As a simple function test, an open hand can be waved quickly past the radar sensor of the DFS 700 - if the speed display is set low enough the speed of the hand will be displayed. (14) Switch off the DFS 700, unplug the mains cable and the power supply cable, pull out the USB-cable and refit the service covers. The DFS can be transported to where it will be set up. 6-24 6.5 Configuring the DFS 700 with a PDA All the settings on the DFS 700 can also be made using the supplied PDA-program DFS-CAS. Communication and data transfer between the PDA and the DFS 700 is wireless (Bluetooth). Moreover, the PDA software can be used to diagnose faults in the DFS 700 and download traffic data for the subsequent transfer and analysis on the PC. 6.5.1 Install PDA program PDA Requirements Windows Mobile 5.0 operating system Bluetooth Display-/Monitor resolution 240 x 230 Microsoft .Net Compact Framework 2.0 SP1. PC Requirements PC with Intel Pentium III CD-ROM drive Windows 2000 SP4 or Windows XP SP2 operating system Internet Explorer 5.0 Display-/Monitor resolution 1024 x 768 Microsoft Active SynC 4.2 (or higher) 20 MB free disk space At least 256 MB RAM working memory. Installation (1) Insert the program CD in the CD-ROM drive – the Setup program then runs automatically. (2) Select “Install DFS-CAS for Windows Mobile“ or select “Start” then “Run” from the Windows taskbar and enter the path to the CD ROM drive and the setup program file, e.g. “d:\PDA\Setup.exe” (3) Click “OK” to confirm. The program is installed, in doing so follow the installation instructions. (4) Once installation is complete the program can be started by using the new symbol on the desktop or by selecting it via the “Programs” menu. 6-25 (5) The program can be uninstalled by calling “Settings”, “System Control”, then “Software” and then following the uninstall instructions. 6.5.2 Set up the DFS 700 via Bluetooth connection A Bluetooth connection between PDA and DFS 700 is created in the same way as the procedure for creating a connection between PC and DFS 700 (see Section 6.4.4). (2) Search Bluetooth environment DFSAA09580906 (6) Create paired connection. The Bluetooth PIN of the DFS unit is initially "0000“ (for security reasons change it later! see Section 6.4.6). The paired connection remains permanent and only has to be renewed if the Bluetooth PIN changes or either the PDA or the DFS breaks the paired connection. (7) Select the Serial Port connection as service. (8) In principle, configuring the DFS 700 using the PDA software is analogous to the set up using the PC software (see Section 6.4.6). 6-26 7 Installation and Operation 7.1 Selecting the installation location for DFS 700 To ensure correct measurements the location for the DFS 700 must be selected according to the following criteria: There must be an unobstructed visual field of at least 150 metres in front of the DFS 700. In this area and in the radar beam there must be no objects such as trees, poles, parking vehicles etc. Otherwise the speed display may be falsified and the radar range reduced. Trees, in particular reduce the radar range The location of the DFS 700 must be at least 65 metres away from large traffic signs. Otherwise these large traffic signs can reflect the radar beams such that the vehicles in the opposite lane could be recorded by the radar beam. Do not set the DFS 700 up directly at crossing intersections or bridges. The DFS 700 must be at least 125 metres away from crossing traffic, as it could otherwise also record the crossing traffic as oncoming vehicles. Where solar cells are used for powering the DFS, the location must have an unhindered view of the sky to achieve the highest charge-capacity. Trees and buildings can cast shadows on solar panels and therefore greatly reduce the performance of the solar cells. The environment around the optional GSM antenna must be kept free of metallic objects so as to guarantee optimum data transfer over the mobile phone network. 7-1 7.2 Mounting the DFS 700 This section describes how to mount the DFS at the designated location. NOTE Pay particular attention to safety advices as specified in Section 2. To avoid danger from flowing traffic the location should be secured, see Section 2 Safety Hints. As a basic principle, this work can be done by one person. For tightening, only commercially available tools are required. 7.2.1 Standard model DFS 700 (1) At the selected location place the pre-mounted DFS on the ground with its two mounting brackets (Figure 7-1 Item 1) on a fixed pole that is 60 mm in diameter and has been tested for a secure and stable stand (Figure 7-1 Item 6). (2) Place the pole clips (Figure 7-1 Item 2) on the two mounting brackets around the pole and loosely join the clips together using the supplied hexagonal bolts (Figure 7-1 Item 3) and washers (Figure 7-1 Item 4) with the hexagonal nuts (Figure 7-1 Item 5). 3 x2 1 2 4 x2 5 x2 5 6 2 1 Figure 7-1 Mount DFS 700 4 x2 3 x2 5 x2 7-2 (3) When setting up beside a road, push the DFS 700 two metres up the fixing pole and lightly tighten the fixing screws. As long as the DFS is not fixed in place it should always be supported by a hand, as it can otherwise slip downward! There is the risk of injury! (4) Rotate the DFS 700 horizontally such that the radiated beam lies over the carriageway to be monitored, see Figure 7-2. The maximum horizontal angle of rotation should be below 10°. (5) Tighten the joints. If necessary secure the DFS 700 from slipping by a clamp on the fixing pole or a transverse bolt. In the case of a longer set-up time (after approx. 2 days) tighten the bolts again. max. 10° 2m 14° 24° Figure 7-2 Aligning the DFS 700 beside a road 7-3 (6) Where the DFS 700 is mounted in a fixed position above the road (e.g. on a signal bridge), the DFS 700 must be located at a height of 4 to 6 metres centrally above the lane to be monitored. The fixing pole holding the DFS 700 must be vertically tiltable, so as to align the DFS 700 to the lane. Tilt the DFS 700 vetically such that the radiated beam lies over the carriageway to be monitored, see Figure 7-3. The vertical angle of tilt should be 6° to 8° downwards. max. 6° to 8° 4-6m 14° 24° Figure 7-3 Aligning the DFS 700 above a road 7-4 7.2.2 DFS 700 with Battery- & Mounting Box (1) At the selected location suspend the speed display unit by the frame from the Battery- & Mounting Box. (2) Set the Battery- & Mounting Box up on the ground. Unscrew the four hexagonal nuts (Figure 7-4 Item 1) on the inside and remove the clamping frame (Figure 7-4 Item 3) with the four threaded bolts (Figure 7-4 Item 2) completely from the casing (Figure 7-4 Item 5). (3) Set the casing on a fixed pole that is 60 to 140 millimetres in diameter and has been tested for a secure and stable stand. Press the clamping plate around the pole back into the casing. Loosely screw the four hexagonal nuts onto the threaded bolts. (4) If provided, place an already charged Battery in the casing. (5) When setting up beside a road, push the Battery- & Mounting Box two metres up the fixing pole and lightly tighten the hexagonal nuts. As long as the DFS is not fixed in place it should always be supported by a hand, as it can otherwise slip downward! There is the risk of injury! 2 x4 3 5 4 1 x2 1 x2 Figure 7-4 Mount the Battery- & Mounting Box 7-5 (6) Rotate the Battery- & Mounting Box horizontally such that - with the display unit subsequently in place - the radiated beam lies over the carriageway to be monitored, see Figure 7-2. The maximum horizontal angle of rotation should be below 10°. If necessary secure the Battery- & Mounting Box from slipping by a clamp on the fixing pole or a transverse bolt. In the case of a longer set-up time (after approx. 2 days), tighten the fixings again. (7) Where the Battery- & Mounting Box is mounted in a fixed position above the road (e.g. on a signal bridge), it must be located centrally at a height of 4 to 6 metres above the lane to be monitored. The fixing pole holding the mounted Battery- & Mounting Box must be vertically tiltable, so as to align the DFS 700 with the lane. Tilt the box vertically such that the radiated beam lies over the carriageway to be monitored, see Figure 7-3. The vertical angle of tilt should be 6° to 8° downwards. (8) Hang the frame with the display unit into the hinge again, close it in front of the Battery- & Mounting Box and lock it in place with the key, see Figure 7-5. 1 3 2 Figure 7-5 Attach and lock frame to Battery- & Mounting Box 7-6 7.3 Connecting and switching electrical power This section describes the different options for providing the necessary power for operating the DFS 700. NOTE To connect the DFS 700 to the public power supply outdoors, a connection must be available that satisfies the local electrical guidelines and safety requirements. The power supply line phase [brown/black wire] must be secured with a suitable fuse, typically 4 to 6 A. Otherwise the electronics in the DFS 700 may be damaged or destroyed in case of over-current. When the DFS 700 is in a fixed installation, e.g. to street lights, a disconnectable over- current protective device (max. 6A) according to EN60950 must be installed between the power supply line and the DFS 700. For service work on the DFS 700 the power supply must be disconnected via the over-current protective device. The over-current protective device is to be installed in accordance with the local electrical guidelines and safety requirements. Therefore in Scandinavia, for example, a cut out must have a 2-pole connection against grounding. The electrical connections must always be produced in accordance with the requirements for the intended location. In the case of fixed installations the plug on the power supply unit or the Charger may have to be removed. If the plug is still to be used, then an adequately waterproof, weather-resistant, and properly mounted socket with protection to the power line as specified above is to be provided. Pay particular attention to further safety advices specified in Section 2. For compliance with CE Regulations for fixed installations, where the Charger is connected to the public mains network, a frequency filter has to be used in the supply line. Following types can be used: 1. Schurter 5500.2034 FMLB-0109-2040 2. Schurter 5500.2043 FMW2-52-2/1.25 7-7 7.3.1 Mains operation with the standard model (1) Remove the lower service cover and insert the DFS power cable (Figure 7-6 Item 3) from the Power Supply Unit box (Figure 7-6 Item 1) into the right-hand plug (Figure 7-6 Item 5). (2) Connect the mains cable (Figure 7-6 Item 2) from the Power Supply Unit box to the mains. (3) Switch on the DFS 700 at the switch (Figure 7-6 Item 4). After switching the DFS 700 on it performs a short self-check followed by the display of two horizontal bars "- -" as confirmation. In case of issues the display will show one of the codes explained in Section 9.4. (4) Refit the service cover. (5) Test the display function with a hand movement. 1 2 Power 5 3 4 Figure 7-6 Electrical connections DFS 700 standard model 7-8 7.3.2 Mains operation using Battery- & Mounting Box In this case the Power Supply Unit box is built into the Battery- & Mounting Box (Figure 7-7 Item 1). The electrical cable is to be connected and switched on after opening the device as described in Section 7.3.1 and shown in Figure 7-7. 1 Power Figure 7-7 DFS 700 with Battery- & Mounting Box 7.3.3 Buffered mains operation with Battery and Charger The Battery to be used in this configuration should be fully charged in advance! (1) Remove the lower service cover on the open DFS 700 and insert the power supply cable (Figure 7-8 Item 6) from the Charger (Figure 7-8 Item 2) into the left-hand plug (Figure 7- 8 Item 3). (2) Insert the cable (Figure 7-8 Item 8) of the Battery (Figure 7-8 Item 1) into the centre plug (Figure 7-8 Item 4). The right-hand plug is not powered by the Charger. (3) Connect the mains cable (Figure 7-8 Item 7) from the Charger to the mains. 7-9 (4) Switch on the DFS 700 at the switch (Figure 7-8 Item 5). After switching the DFS 700 on it performs a short self-check followed by the display of two horizontal bars "- -" as confirmation. In case of issues the display will show one of the codes explained in Section 9.4. (5) Refit the service cover and close the DFS 700. (6) Test the display function with a hand movement. 1 2 3 4 Power 7 8 6 5 Figure 7-8 Battery buffered mains operation The Battery is also charged even if the DFS 700 is switched off. A coloured LED on the Charger indicates the charge progress. If the LED lights up green, the Battery is fully charged and the charging process can be ended. The Battery-charging process can also be done directly from the Charger without involving the DFS. For compliance with CE Regulations for fixed installations, where the Charger is connected to the public mains network, a frequency filter has to be used in the supply line. Following types can be used: 1. Schurter 5500.2034 FMLB-0109-2040 2. Schurter 5500.2043 FMW2-52-2/1.25 7-10 7.3.4 Battery operation with one or two Batteries The Batteries to be used in this configuration should be charged in advance! (1) Remove the lower service cover on the open DFS 700 and insert the cable (Figure 7-9 Item 3) of the first Battery into the centre plug (Figure 7-9 Item 7). (2) If available, insert the cable (Figure 7-9 Item 4) of the second Battery (Figure 7-9 Item 2) into the right-hand plug (Figure 7-9 Item 7). (3) Switch on the DFS 700 at the switch (Figure 7-9 Item 5). After switching the DFS 700 on it performs a short self-check followed by the display of two horizontal bars "- -" as confirmation. In case of issues the display will show one of the codes explained in Section 9.4. (4) Refit the service cover and close the DFS. (5) Test the display function with a hand movement. 1 2 6 7 Figure 7-9 Battery operation 3 4 5 7-11 7.3.5 Power supply to the GSM/GPRS Modem If the GSM/GPRS Modem is used, the following work has to be carried out in addition before the DFS 700 is switched on. (1) Remove both service covers on the DFS 700. (2) Insert the activated SIM-card (Figure 7-10 Item 1) into the modem (Figure 7-10 Item 2), if this has not already been done. See also section 4.5. (3) Plug the power supply cable (Figure 7-10 Item 6) into the connection socket of the GSM modem (Figure 7-10 Item 7) and the other plug into the socket on the DFS (Figure 7-10 Item 3). (4) Connect the GSM-data cable (Figure 7-10 Item 5) to the sockets on the DFS and GSM Modem (Figure 7-10 Item 8 and 4) and tighten them. 2 8 3 4 1 7 6 5 Figure 7-10 Connect the GSM/GPRS Modem (5) Approx. 10 seconds after switching on the DFS 700 the LED on the side of the modem should flash - the modem is then registered in the mobile network. If the LED lights continuously, check the PIN entry and correct it if required. The modem is ready for use approx. 40 seconds after switching on the DFS 700. 7-12 8 Analysis of Speed Data Measurements While the DFS is in operation all the speed measurements in the defined speed range (Figure 6-19) are stored. The memory in the DFS has space for 100,000 time-stamped measurements. When the memory is full the oldest data will be overwritten first (ring buffer). With the software the data can be downloaded to PC or PDA and then analysed statistically. 8.1 Transfering measurements to PC or PDA (1) To transfer data from the DFS 700 to PC, establish a USB, Bluetooth or GSM connection, see Section 6.4. (2) Start the DFS-CAS program, highlight the device to be read in the “DFS List” and open the download window via the “Read DFS data” command. Figure 8-1 Read data from DFS A data storage path is suggested as standard here for the data to be read. It can be changed if required. The suggested path is located in the data folder and is named like the selected DFS. The filename is composed of "Year/Month/Day/ Hour/Minute/Second" and the extension ".dat". (3) After pressing “OK” all data is transferred from the DFS 700 to the PC. The transfer progress is displayed in the "Com Monitor" window and can take several minutes. 8-1 (4) If a PDA is used, the data has to transferred to the PDA first and then to the PC for further processing. Data transfer to and from the PDA must be done in accordance with the PDA's system instructions. 8.2 Assigning measurements to a location (1) The downloaded data must be assigned to a location before it can be analyzed with the software. Highlight the appropriate location in the “Location List” and open the “Read data from file” window via “Location” and “Assign data”. (2) Select and “open” the freshly downloaded .dat file in the data directory - the data will be allocated to the selected location. Figure 8-2 Load data from file While assigning data downloaded from a DFS to a location new files were created in a sub-folder of the data folder. These files can be identified by the extension ".vms" and there is one file per measured day. The file that was downloaded from the DFS (extension ".dat") is not needed then anymore. 8-2 8.3 Viewing measurements (1) All data previously assigned to a selected location can be viewed in the “Measurements” window via the “View measurements” command. Figure 8-3 View measurements (2) All measurements for a selected day and selected time period are listed after pressing “View”. Here individual measurements can be checked if needed. 8-3 8.4 Creating reports A data report can be generated for a selected location in order to analyse all assigned data statistically. (1) Select and mark the location in the “Location List”. (2) Open the “Data report” window via the “Create report” command. The data report window consists of three areas from left to right: the data selection area, the report table area, the chart buttons. Figure 8-4 Data report 8-4 (3) The analysis table is created for the selected reporting period and according to the speed, weekday, and daytime filtering criteria after pressing the “Apply” button. (4) The selected data can also be presented as one of eight different graphs by pressing one of the buttons on the right of the window. All graphic charts can be printed via the functions of the menu bar. In the print view and on printing, the logo specified in “Options” is shown. “Measurement quantity over reporting period” button This chart shows the number of measurements over time for the selected reporting period. The time interval is defined in the "Data report" window (Figure 8-4). Figure 8-5 Measurement quantity over reporting period 8-5 “Measurement quantity over daytime bins” button This chart shows the number of measurements over time-of-day for the selected reporting period. The time interval is specified in the "Data report" window (Figure 8-4). Figure 8-6 Measurement quantity over daytime bins “Speed stats over reporting period” button This chart shows the maximum speed, the mean speed, and the n-th percentile speed (e.g. v85%) over time for the selected reporting period. The time interval is defined in the "Data report" window (Figure 8-4). Figure 8-7 Speed stats over reporting period 8-6 “Speed stats over daytime bins” button This chart shows the maximum speed, the mean speed, and the n-th percentile speed (e.g. v85%) over time-of-day for the selected reporting period. The time interval and desired percentile are defined in the "Data report" window (Figure 8-4). Figure 8-8 Speed stats over daytime bins “Measurement quantity over speed bins” button This chart shows the number of measurements relative to speed intervals for the selected reporting period. The speed interval is preset in the "Data report" window (Figure 8-4). Figure 8-9 Measurement quantity over speed bins 8-7 “Speed over measurement percentage” button This chart shows the speed percentiles for the selected reporting period selected in the "Data report" window (Figure 8-4). A speed percentile specifies the percentage of all measurements, which stayed under a specific speed. In v85% this means: 85% of all vehicles stayed under this speed. Figure 8-10 Speed over measurement percentage “Statistics over weekdays” button This chart shows the maximum, mean and v85-speeds and the number of measurements over weekdays for the selected reporting period. The report period and the desired percentile are defined in the "Data report" window (Figure 8-4). Figure 8-11 Statistics over weekdays 8-8 “Measurement quantity over daytime and speed bins” button This 3-D chart unites the displays of Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-9. It shows in three axes the number of measurements related to time-of-day and speed intervals for the selected reporting period according to the defined speed and time intervals in the "Data report" window (Figure 8- 4). Figure 8-12 Measurement quantity over daytime and speed bins 8-9 9 Service and Maintenance 9.1 Cleaning (1) Clean the speed display and the reflective front of the frame with a clean, dry cloth NOTE The use of aggressive detergents and abrasives can damage the reflective coating and should therefore be avoided! (2) Clean all air vents on the DFS 700 outside and inside with a cloth or a broom. The air supply vents must always be kept uncovered. (3) Clean rough dirt from the DFS 700 with a broom. 9.2 Maintenance The DFS 700 is maintenance-free as a basic principle. Before setting it up, subject the equipment to a visual inspection and, while doing so, pay particular attention to the condition of the mains cables. These must not be damaged but, if they are, have the cable replaced by a qualified electrician. If Batteries are used, check that their external condition is perfect in advance. In case of damage, replace the Battery. When handling batteries pay particular attention to further safety advices as specified in Section 2. Risk of injury as a result of leaking liquid exists! When replacing components only original Bremicker parts should be used. The manufacturer’s warranty expires if components from other manufacturers are used. The electrical connection components such as plugs, sockets, cables, etc., are standard commercial electrical goods which can be replaced by a qualified electrician. 9-1 9.3 Symptom / solution table Possible defects and unexpected behaviour of the DFS 700 can be limited and corrected using the symptom / solution table shown below. Problems and errors that the operator can not cannot localize and correct using this table should be communicated to the Customer Services. Symptom Possible cause Solution DFS 700 does not show Power temporarily not available Check power supply any reaction during day (e.g. street lamp) time Wrongly scheduled switching Check switching times in the times operating mode settings Operating mode settings during Chose radar mode in the day time are either limit mode or operating mode settings standby DFS 700 does not show DFS 700 is switched off Switch on DFS 700 any reaction No power to DFS 700 Check power supply Operating mode settings are Chose radar mode in the limit mode or standby operating mode settings DFS 700 fuse failed Check DFS 700 fuse Wrong configuration parameters Check configuration parameters are chosen DFS 700 does not save Wrong configuration parameters Check configuration parameters any data are chosen DFS 700 is switched off or Switch on DFS 700 and chose operating mode setting is radar mode or covert mode in standby the operating mode settings Vehicles were not measured Check the installation location because of non professional and the alignment of the DFS installation 700 Software does not show Software crashed Restart system any reaction System overloaded Shut down all other applications 9-2 Symptom Possible cause Solution Display visibility reduced Dew on the sign Dry the sign and use anti dew if applicable. Check air circulation and if the vents are open Retroreflective sheeting is dirty Clean or replace sheeting or damaged Wrong cleaning of the Clean sheeting only with soft retroreflective sheeting detergent Battery is not charged Battery charger is not installed Check connection to battery again charger Battery and charger is not Check installation of battery connected correctly charger and battery Power temporarily not available Check power supply (e.g. street lamp) Damaged cable of the battery or Change cable charger Battery is connected at Connect battery at connection connection “Battery 2“ “Battery 1” Power of solar panel is to low Solar panel is placed in shadow or the size of the panel does not deliver the needed power Battery empty in less Very high volume of traffic Use second battery than 3 days LED brightness range settings Select lower LED brightness in are very high the configuration parameters Battery damaged (old) Change battery No speed values are DFS 700 is switched off Switch on DFS 700 displayed Operating mode settings are Chose radar mode in the covert mode or standby operating mode settings Wrongly scheduled switching Check switching times in the times operating mode settings Sensitivity of the radar is to low Chose higher sensitivity in configuration parameters 9-3 Symptom Possible cause Solution Cables of power supply are not Check power supply connection correctly connected of DFS 700 DFS 700 fuse failed Check DFS 700 fuse No power to DFS 700 Check power supply Speed range in the configuration Check speed range settings in parameters is wrongly chosen the configuration parameters LED module damaged Check and read out status of the DFS 700 Wrong alignment of the DFS Align DFS 700 correct to the 700 towards the road road LED display in only one Settings are made for only one Specify the second color in the color color configuration settings Only one speed value is Operating mode settings are Chose radar mode in the displayed limit mode operating mode settings Wrong configuration parameters Check configuration parameters Incorrect speed values Operating mode settings are Chose radar mode in the are displayed limit mode operating mode settings Large objects reflecting the Check location and the radar waves alignment of the DFS 700 DFS 700 is not aimed correctly Check location and the alignment of the DFS 700 No speed value is Operating mode settings are Chose radar mode in the displayed covert mode or standby operating mode settings DFS 700 is switched off Switch on DFS 700 9-4 Symptom Possible cause Solution Wrong configuration parameters Check configuration parameters Display brightness is Sensor is dirty / masked Clean sensor very low Brightness settings are to low Check brightness settings in the configuration parameters GSM connection cannot GSM modem is not installed Install and connect GSM be made modem SIM card is not installed Install SIM card in GSM modem Data service of SIM card is not Ask your SIM card provider to activated activate data services SIM card supports just one Chose SIM card with different number for different services numbers for each service (data, voice, fax) GSM connection cannot Wrong PIN code Check SIM-PIN code be made Pre-paid card is out of credit Recharge pre-paid card No or busy phone line Connect phone line to your modem and try to dial-up several times No modem connected to PC or Connect a modem to your PC wrong configuration and check for correct COM port and config. USB connection cannot USB device driver is not Install USB device driver be made installed USB Cable is not connected Connect USB cable COM port in software is different Check COM port settings in to the COM port in the hardware hard- and software settings of the PC Operating system of your PC is Install the recommended too old operating system on your PC Bluetooth connection Driver for Bluetooth is not Install Bluetooth driver cannot be made installed 9-5 Symptom Possible cause Solution No or damaged Bluetooth Check Bluetooth adapter on adapter your PC Pairwise connection was not Check pairwise connection in established your Bluetooth software Serial Bluetooth connection was Connect serial Bluetooth not made yet connection COM port in software is different Check COM port settings in to the COM port in the hardware hard- and software settings of the PC Bluetooth- or GSM-PIN Tried to change them via PIN code can only be changed Code cannot be Bluetooth via USB connection changed Tried to change them via GSM PIN code can only be changed via USB connection PDA Software cannot Setup program is in a deep Start setup program from be installed folder another folder, e.g. "C:\temp" Name of the setup folder Check setup folder name and includes a blank choose different Wrong version of ActiveSync on Download and install your PC ActiveSync Version 4.2 Mounting Box cannot be Rubber seal has sliped Check rubber seal on your closed mounting box Cables are between the rubber Check mounting box for cables seal and the DFS 700 which could be hanging outside of the mounting box Mounting box is not correctly Check assembly of the installed mounting box Wrong key Check serial number of DFS 700 and number of key Water in the mounting Rubber seals untight Check rubber seals box Formation of condensed water Check and clean the air vents Assembling of the mounting box Check assembling of the is not correct mounting box 9-6 9.4 Diagnostic status check There are three ways of obtaining diagnostic information from the DFS 700: via the display, by SMS (with GSM Modem), with the software. The DFS performs a short self-check when switched on and shows a status code on its display if applicable (see table below). After finishing the check two horizontal bars "- -" are shown as a confirmation. The DFS also performs an extensive self-check every 24 hours and, if applicable, sends a status code by SMS to a defined mobile phone number (see section 6.4.6). This function requires the use of the optional GSM Modem and the availability of a SIM card with data services from a local GSM supplier (see section 4.5). Diagnostic Information and additional device information can be obtained from the DFS anytime using the "Status" command in the PC or PDA software. The following additional information can be obtained that way:  Serial number  Firmware version  Manufacturing date  Date and time in DFS (at the time of communication)  Number of speed data sets in the memory 3M-DFS700 AA09580906 19.09.06 003.016.000 21.01.2006 07:53:47 Sunday 0 255 255 12,1 V OK OK OK No Answer (Code 1h) OK OK OK Figure 9-1 DFS Status 9-7 This table lists the status codes of the DFS 700 and indicates by which means they can be issued be the DFS. The SMS codes in square brackets [ ] will be sent as english text, while the others are sent as codes. Code Explanation Display SMS SW 1 No response from GSM Modem 1 3 No response from data memory 3 3 4 Data memory 75% full 04 [4] 4 5 Data memory full 05 [5] 5 6 Supply voltage too low (below 11,5 V) 06 [6] 6 7 No Communication to radar 07 7 7 8 No Communication to Bluetooth 8 8 9 No Communication to real-time clock 9 9 10 Battery for real-time clock empty 10 [10] 10 11 Diplay defect 11 11 11 64 SIM not inserted 64 65 SIM PIN or PUK is missing 65 66 SMS transmission not successfull 66 67 GSM connection not successfull 67 70 SIM PIN is wrong 70 80 Bluetooth connection not successfull 80 81 Wrong Bluetooth PIN 81 -- Start diagnostics finished -- 9.5 Firmware update The firmware is the control program running in the DFS 700. When a newer firmware version is issued by Bremicker it can be recorded over the existing version. On delivery of a new firmware version, it also includes installation instructions. The firmware version and the serial number of the DFS 700 program are contained in the “Status” window, see Figure 9-1. 9-8 10 Technical Data DFS 700 – Complete system Dimensions in mm ................................................................ 660 wide x 770 high x 110 deep Weight ...........................................................................................................................8.5 kg Speed-display device Line voltage .................................................................................................... 11.3 V – 15.0 V Electrical power Standby mode.......................................................................................... 0.02 A (0.24 W) Radar mode with inactive display ............................................................ 0.08 A (0.96 W) Radar mode with active single-colour display ............................................. 1.00 A (12 W) Maximum power .............................................................................................. 5 A (60 W) (less than 1 second with all active components) Fuse .............................................................................................ATO 4A Delay Action Fuse Case ingress protection .................................................................................................. IP 54 Case colour ............................................................................................................ RAL 7042 Permissible ambient temperature (in the casing) ............................................... -35 to +75°C Permissible humidity .............................................................................................. up to 95% Digital display .............................................................................. 330 mm high 450 mm wide 2 1/2-digital display with 13 segments, highest displayable value: 199 LEDs ...................................................................................................... InGaAIP SMD LEDs Viewving angle 16° to 18° 3 rows green LEDs (570 mm) 3 rows red LEDs (635 mm) Buffer battery for real-time clock............................................................ 3 V CR 2450 Lithium Durability approx. 2 years Data storage Non-volatile memory ................................................................................................. 1 MB Data inputs...................................................................................................max. 100,000 Radar frequency ............................................................................... 24.15 GHz – 24.25 GHz Radar output................................................................................................ 20 dBm, 100 mW 10-1 Radar speed-measurement range............................................................ 3 km/h to 199 km/h (can be limited) Radar speed-measurement tolerance ± 2 km/h for speeds under 100 km/h ± 2% km/h for speeds over 100 km/h Radar distance range .......................................................approx. 100 m for a passenger car Angle of radar beam ..................................................................... 14° horizontal, 24° vertical Bluetooth transceiver Class 2 module, 4 dBm output, up to 20 m range Interfaces for USB, Bluetooth, Battery Charger, Battery 1 (is charged when Battery Charger connected), Battery 2, Main switch, RS232-socket for GSM Modem, GSM power supply, Activation switch for external devices, Grounding bolt Activation switch ................................................................. Max. 24 VAC/DC, Max. 150 mA, plug type: Weidmüller BLZF 3.5/3/F SNOR Control program (Firmware) ....................................................................................updatable Fixing Frame Reflective coating (Diamond Grade, white) Printable surface ............................................................................... 53 cm wide, 29 cm high Power Supply Unit Box (optional equipment) Input ....................................................... 100 V - 240 VAC @ 50 - 60 Hz, Protection Class 1 Output.......................................................................... 12 V/100 W, Ingress Protection IP 55 Weight .............................................................................................................. approx. 2.0 kg GSM Modem (optional equipment) Type ....................................................................................... Wavecom 900 MHz/1800 MHz requires SIM-card with data service (Circuit Switched Data Services) from a local GSM supplier, see Section 4.5 Weight with antenna ....................................................................................... approx. 0.25 kg 10-2 Battery (optional equipment) Electrical output ....................................................................................................12 V, 17 Ah Standby time ...................................................... approx. 850 hours after being fully charged with the optional Battery Charger Weight .............................................................................................................. approx. 6.0 kg Battery Charger (optional equipment) Input ....................................................... 100 V - 240 VAC @ 50 - 60 Hz, Protection Class 2 Output..................................................................... max. 12 V/60 W Ingress Protection IP 67 Temperature range............................................................................................- 40° to + 40° Weight .............................................................................................................. approx. 1.0 kg Battery- & Mounting Box (optional equipment) useable pole diameter ...................................................................................... 60 to 140 mm horizontal inclination after installation ................................................................................ -2° Weight, empty ...............................................................................................................7.5 kg Control and Analysis Program (software) for Windows 2000/XP PC ....................................... DFS-CAS Control and Analysis Software for Windows Mobile 5.0 PDA .................................. DFS-CAS Control and Analysis Software 10-3 HD II Hankelepingu projekt TÖÖVÕTULEPING Maanteeamet , registrikoodiga 70001490, asukohaga Teelise 4 , 10916 Tallinn (edaspidi Tellija), mida esindab Maanteeameti pead irektor/ mida volituse alusel esindab Maanteeameti ……… ja ………………… registrikoodiga ……………, asukohaga …………………… (edaspidi Töövõtja), mida esindab juhatuse liige/mida volituse alusel esindab ………………, Tellija ja Töövõtja (edaspidi koos Pooled või eraldi Pool ), sõlmisid töövõtulepingu (edaspidi Leping ) alljärgnevas: Lepingu ese Lepingu esemeks on k iirustabloode , märgutuledega märkide ning hoiatuslampide hooldus 2021 .a -2023 .a . Kiirustabloode puhastamine , kontrollimine , statistika mahalaadimine ning Maanteeametile edastamine , riketest teavitamine ja tehniliste rikete parandamine . Samuti ka kiirustabloode ümberseadistamine ning sisse / välja lülitamine . Hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega märkide puhastamine , kontrollimine , riketest teavitamine ja parandus (edaspidi Töö), mida Töövõtja kohustub tegema vastavalt Lepingus ja Lepingu Lisades toodud tingimustele. Tööna käsitletakse kõiki töid ja toiminguid, sh Lepingus nimetamata töid ja toiminguid, mis on vajalikud Lepingus ettenähtud tulemuse saavutamiseks, samuti Töö vastuvõtmiseks vajaliku dokumentatsiooni vormistamisega seotud toiminguid. Lepingu üldtingimused Lepingul on selle sõlmimise hetkel järgmised lisad: Lisa 1 – Tehniline kirjeldus. Lisa 2 – Töövõtja poolt esitatud hinnapakkumus. Lisa 3 – Tööde üle andmis- ja vastuvõtmisakti vorm. Pooled juhinduvad Lepingu täitmisel lisaks Lepingule ja selle lisadele ka Eesti Vabariigis kehtivatest õigusaktidest, eeskirjadest, standarditest ning vajadusel muudest vastava valdkonna tehnilistest dokumentidest. Lepin g on sõlmitud avatud menetluse riigihanke „ Kiirustabloode, märgutuledega märkide ning hoiatuslampide hooldus 2021-2023 “ (viitenumber 224439) tulemusena. Kui Lepingus ei ole sätestatud teisiti, siis viiteid kindlale punktile, alapunktile või lisale tõlgendatakse viidetena Lepingu vastavale punktile, alapunktile või lisale. Lepingus on kasutatud pealkirju vaid viitamise lihtsustamise huvides ning neid ei arvestata Lepingu sätete defineerimisel, tõlgendamisel või piiramisel. Lepingus, kus kontekst seda nõuab, võivad ainsuses olevad sõnad tähendada mitmust ja vastupidi. Lepingu täitmise keel on eesti keel. Tähtajad ja T öö üleandmine Töö de te gemise kavandatav ajaperiood on 01.02.2021.a kuni 31.01.2023.a. Tellija eeldab , et saab h ankelepingu sõlmida hiljemalt 31 . 01 .20 21 .a . Juhul, kui Tellijast sõltuvatest või sõltumatutest asjaoludest tulenevalt ei ole jõut ud Lepingut sõlmida hiljemalt 31.01 .20 21 .a, siis Töö teostamist alustatakse Lepingu sõlmimisele järgnevast päevast ning leping pikeneb nende päevade võrra , millal Leping sõlmitakse . Töö üleandmine on sätestatud Lepingu lisas 1. Töö üleandmisel esitab Töövõtja Tellijale Lepingu kohase Tööde üleandmis- ja vastuvõtmisakti. Tellija peab Töö üle vaatama 10 töö päeva jooksul pärast Töö ning üleandmis- ja vastuvõtmisakti saamist. Juhul, kui Töö vastuvõtmisel on Tellijal pretensioone Töö kvaliteedi ja/või Lepingule vastavuse osas, ei allkirjasta Tellija kontaktisik üleandmis- ja vastuvõtmisakti ning edastab Töövõtjale kirjalikult Töös ilmnenud vead ning puudused. Töövõtja kohustub vead ning puudused likvideerima 5 kalendripäeva jooksul alates Tellija poolt kirjaliku teate saamisest ja esitama parandatud Töö Tellijale (täiendav tähtaeg vastavalt võlaõigusseaduse § 114). Kui Töö (sh Töö osa) kontrollimisel selgub, et Töös on puudused, loetakse Töö tähtaegselt üle andmata. Tellijal on õigus kuni puuduste likvideerimiseni Töövõtja poolt keelduda Töö vastuvõtmisest ja selle eest maksmisest. Poolte õigused ja kohustused Tellijal on õigus : igal ajal teha järelpärimisi Tööde tegemise hetke olukorra kohta ning kontrollida Tööde tegemise käiku; pöörduda kolmandate isikute poole sõltumatu eksperthinnangu saamiseks Tööde kvaliteedi kohta ; kasutada õiguskaitsevahendeid (sh öelda Leping üles), samuti nõuda Lepingus sätestatud juhtudel leppetrahvi, kui Töövõtja ei pea kinni Lepingus, selle lisades või muudes Lepingu juurde kuuluvates dokumentid es sätestatud tähtaegadest, kva liteedinõuetest, maksumusest, samuti kui Töövõtja ei täida või täidab mittevastavalt muid endale Lepinguga võetud kohustusi . Tellijal on kohustus: tasuda Töövõtjale tehtud Tööde eest vastavalt Lepingule; tasuda viivist vastavalt Lepingule . Töövõtjal on õigus : saada Tellijalt Töö tegemiseks vajalikku informatsiooni ja juhiseid ; saada Töö eest Lepingus kokkulepitud tasu . Töövõtjal on kohustus : teha Tööd vastavalt Lepingule; tagada Töö tegemisel vajaliku kvalifikatsiooniga tööjõu kasutamine ja kui konkreetsete tööde tegemiseks on õigusaktides kehtestatud nõuded , et vastavat tööd võivad teostada isikud , kellel on muuhulgas majandustegevuse teade , tegevusluba või registreering , siis tagada , et vastavaid töid teostaksid isikud , kellel on nõutud majandustegevuse teade , tegevusluba või registreering või muu dokument , mis annab isikule õiguse vastava töö tegemiseks . Töövõtja peab omama valmistajatehase poolt välja antud kiirustabloo hooldusõigust tõendavat sertifikaati või töövõtja spetsialist peab omama kiirustabloo alast koolitussertifikaati või töövõtja peab omandama valmistajatehase kiirustabloo hooldeõigust tõendava sertifikaadi hiljemalt 01.01.2021.a või töövõtja spetsialist peab omandama kiirustabloo alase koolitussertifikaadi hiljemalt 01.01.2021.a. tagada , et kui Töövõtja tugines hankemenetluses kvalifitseerimise tingimuste vastavuse tõendamiseks teiste isikute vahenditele , siis teised isikud osalevad vahetult Lepingu täitmisel alltöövõtjana vähemalt osas , milles teiste isikute vahenditele tugineti . vastutada selle eest, et Töö oleks tehtud korrektselt ja kvaliteetselt; informeerida viivitamatult Tellijat Töö tegemise käigus tekkinud probleemidest; tasuda leppetrahvi vastavalt Lepingule. Pooltel on õigus Lepingust tulenevaid ja sellega seotud nõudeid ja kohustusi kolmandatele isikutele üle anda ainult teise Poole eelneval nõusolekul, mis on Lepinguga samas vormis. Mittekohaselt üle antud nõuete ja kohustuste osas jääb teise Poole ees vastutavaks nõuded ja/või kohustused üle andnud Pool. Autoriõigused Töövõtja annab Tellijale ainulitsentsi koos all-litsentsi andmise õigusega kõigile Lepingu alusel teostatud Tööle tekkivatele varalistele õigustele, sealhulgas autoriõiguse seaduse §13 1 ja §13 2 nimetatud varalistele õigustele, ning need loetakse Tellijale üleantuks Lepingu hinna tasumisega. Töövõtja kinnitab, et ta on võtnud tarvitusele kõik meetmed autori(te) isiklike õiguste realiseerimiseks viisil, mis ei takista ega raskenda Töö tulemusena valminud teose kasutamist ega varaliste õiguste teostamist Tellija poolt . Töövõtja kinnitab Lepingu sõlmimisega, et Töö tulemusena valminud teose kasutamisel ei pea autori(te) nimi (nimed) olema tähistatud. Töövõtja kinnitab Lepingu sõlmimisega, et autor(id) on andnud nõusoleku teha Tellijal Töö tulemusena valminud teoses ja selle pealkirjas mistahes muudatusi, samuti lisada teosele teiste autorite teoseid (illustratsioone, eessõnasid, järelsõnasid, kommentaare, selgitusi, uusi osasid jms). Lepingu p-des 5.1.-5.4 nimetatud õigused kehtivad territoriaalsete piiranguteta ja autoriõiguse kehtivusaja jooksul. Tasumine Leping on ühikhindadel põhinev leping. Töö maksumus on orienteeruvalt …eurot, millele lisandub käibemaks 20% summas … eurot, kokku … eurot (edaspidi Tasu), mis on Töövõtja poolt esitatud Lepingu lisas 2 toodud kogumaksumus. Lepingu lisas 2 toodud Tööde kogused on indikatiivsed ja Tellijal on õigus tellida nimetatud kogusest rohkem või vähem Töid ning sellest tulenevalt võib muutuda ka Tasu. Töö teostamise ühik hindade maksumused on toodud Lepingu lisas 2 . Tellija tasub Töövõtjale Lepingu tingimuste kohaselt teostatud kiirustabloode, ülekäiguraja hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega liiklusmärkide hoolduste teostamise eest kolm korda kalendri aastas vastavalt Lepingu s ja L isa 1 T ehnilises kir jelduses sätestatud tingimustele, võttes aluseks L isa 2 Hinnapakkumuses olevad ühik hinnad . Tellija tasub Töövõtjale Lepingu tingimuste kohaselt teostatud kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise koos elektriühenduse rajamisega, kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise ilma elektriühenduse rajamiseta kaabelliinist, kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise koos postiga ja kiirustabloode ümberseadistamise või sisse/välja lülitamise eest igakordselt peale vastava töö teostamist vastavalt Lepingus ja Lisa 1 Tehnilises kirjelduses sätestatud tingimustele, võttes aluseks Lisa 2 Hinnapakkumuses olevad ühikhinnad . Tellija tasub Töövõtjale Poolte poolt allakirjutatud Tööde üleandmis- ja vastuvõtmisakti alusel koostatud arve alusel 20 kalendri päeva jooksul pärast arve saamist. Arve tuleb esitada 7 kalendripäeva jooksul, pärast Töö vastuvõtmist Tellija poolt , masintöödeldaval kujul, e-arvena, mis vastab Eesti Pangaliidu standardile ja Rahandusministri 11.04.2017 määrusele nr 24 „Masintöödeldava algdokumendi juhendi kehtestamine“ . Arve loetakse laekunuks selle Maanteeameti arvete halduskeskkonda laekumise kuupäevast . Mitteresidentidel tuleb pdf formaadis arve saata meiliaadressile [email protected] või edastada see e- arvena rahvusvahelise Peppol süsteemi kaudu . Arvele tuleb märkida kontaktisiku nimi ja Lepingu number ning tööde teostamise või teenuste osutamise periood. Poolte vastutus Töövõtja on kohustatud hüvitama Lepingu mittetäitmise või mittekohase täitmisega Tellijale tekitatud kahju ja Tellija poolt seoses Töövõtja poolse Lepingu rikkumisega tehtud kulutused. Tellija vastutab Lepingu rikkumise eest ja on kohustatud Töövõtjale hüvitama Lepingu rikkumisega tekitatud kahju ning Töövõtja poolt Tellija poolse Lepingu rikkumisega seoses tehtud kulutused. Töövõtjal on õigus nõuda Tellijalt viivist tasumisega viivitamise korral 0,2% tähtaegselt tasumata arve summast iga tasumise tähtpäeva ületanud päeva eest. Tellijal on õigus rakendada sanktsioonina leppetrahvi iga rikkumise korral kuni 10% Tasust , kokku mitte rohkem kui 30% Tasust, kui Töövõtja on rikkunud oma L epingulisi kohustusi . Leppetrahvinõude või teate leppetrahvinõude esitamise kavatsusest peab Tellija Töövõtjale esitama 6 kuu jooksul kohustuse rikkumise avastamisest arvates. Juhul kui Töövõtja rikub Lepingus sätestatud tähtaegu, on Tellijal õigus nõuda Töövõtjalt leppetrahvi 0,2% Tasust, iga viivitatud päeva eest. Leppetrahvinõude või teate leppetrahvinõude esitamise kavatsusest peab Tellija Töövõtjale esitama 6 kuu jooksul kohustuse rikkumise avastamisest arvates. Tähtaegade ületamise korral ei kohaldu eelmises punktis sätestatud leppetrahvi piirmäär. Pooled on kokku leppinud, et Töövõtja kohustub hüvitama Lepingu täitmise käigus tekkinud kahju kolmandatele isikutele. Töövõtja kohustub oma kulul esindama Tellijat Lepingu alusel täidetavate ülesannete või toimingutega seotud kõigis vaidlustes (sh kohtuvaidlustes) kolmandate isikutega ning kandma kõik sellega kaasnevad menetluskulud. Tellija võib Töö Lepingu tingimustele mittevastavusele tugineda seaduses sätestatud aegumistähtaja jooksul. Poolte kont akt isikud Töövõtja kontaktisik : ..., ..., ..., tel.: (+372) ..., e-post: …; Tellija kontaktisik : ….. , ….. , tel: (+372) ….. , e-post: …. Lepingu kehtivus Leping jõustub selle allkirjastamisel ja kehtib kuni Lepingust tulenevate kohustuste täitmiseni. Tellija võib Lepingust taganeda ning nõuda leppetrahvi kuni 10 % Tasust , kui Töövõtja rikub oluliselt oma õigusaktidest või Lepingust tulenevaid kohustusi . Tellija võib Lepingu üles öelda võlaõigusseaduses ettenähtud korras . Tellijal on õigus nimetatud summa maha arvata Töövõtjale tasumisele kuuluvast summast. Töövõtja võib Lepingust taganeda , kui Tellija rikub oluliselt Lepingu tingimusi. Sellisel juhul on Tellija kohustatud Töövõtjale hüvitama Töövõtja poolt Lepingu täitmisel tehtud kulutused. Leping loetakse koheselt lõppenuks, kui: Töövõtja tegevus lõpeb; kuulutatakse välja Töövõtja pankrot. Teated Pooltevahelised Lepinguga seotud teated peavad olema esitatud kirjalikus vormis, välja arvatud juhtudel, kui sellised teated on informatsioonilise iseloomuga, mille edastamisel teisele Poolele ei ole õiguslikke tagajärgi. Informatsioonilist teadet võib edastada telefoni teel. Kirjalikud teated saadetakse Lepingu Pooltele e-posti teel , selle võimaluse puudumisel antakse Lepingu Pooltele üle allkirja vastu või saadetakse postiga registrijärgsel aadressil . Kui ühe Poole teade on teisele Poolele saadetud Lepingus märgitud e-posti aadressil loetakse see kättesaaduks järgmisel tööpäeval . Muud tingimused Lepingut võib muuta kooskõlas kehtivate õigusaktidega. Kirjalikult vormistamata Lepingu muudatused on tühised. Kõik Lepingu tõlgendamisest või täitmisest tulenevad vaidlused püütakse lahendada Lepingupoolte vaheliste läbirääkimiste teel. Kokkuleppe mittesaavutamisel lahendatakse vaidlus Harju Maakohtus vastavalt Eesti Vabariigis kehtivatele õigusaktidele. Kõigis küsimustes, mis ei ole reguleeritud Lepinguga, juhinduvad Pooled Eesti Vabariigi vastavatest õigusaktidest. Leping allkirjastat akse Poolte poolt digitaalselt. Poolte allkirjad Tellija: Töövõtja: /allkirjastatud digitaalselt / /allkirjastatud digitaalselt/ Lisa 3 TÖÖDE ÜLEANDMIS- JA VASTUVÕTMISAKT Käesolevaga …… ….. annab üle ja Maanteeamet võtab vastu kooskõlas lepinguga “ …………. ”, mis on sõlmitud ......................................... , alljärgneva töö: ___ etapi tööd vastavalt järgnevale kirjeldusele : Üleantavate eksemplaride arv : Digitaalselt esitatud andmed: Märkused: Tellija kontaktisik: Töövõtja kontaktisik : /allkirjastatud digitaalselt/ /allkirjastatud digitaalselt/ KORRALDUS 02.07.2020 nr 1-23/20/541 Riigihanke „Kiirustabloode, märgutuledega märkide ning hoiatuslampide hooldus 2021- 2023“ (viitenumber 224439) riigihanke alusdokumentide muutmine Riigihangete seaduse § 81 ja § 82 ning Maanteeameti peadirektori 18.02.2020. a käskkirjaga nr 1-2/20/158 kinnitatud „Volituste andmine“ alusel, muudan Maanteeameti teehoiudirektori 11.06.2020. a korraldusega nr 1-23/20/481 kinnitatud riigihanke Kiirustabloode, märgutuledega märkide ning hoiatuslampide hooldus 2021-2023“ (viitenumber 224439), hanketeadet ja riigihanke alusdokumente alljärgnevalt: 1. Muuta hanketeadet asendades punktis „IV.2.2) Pakkumuste või osalemistaotluste laekumise tähtaeg“ ja punktis „IV.2.7) Pakkumuste avamise aeg“ tähtaja järgnevaga: „14.07.2020.a kell 10:00“. 2. Muuta HD II Hankelepingu projekti alljärgnevalt: 2.1. Muuta alapunkti 3.4 teksti ja asendada alljärgnevaga: Tellija peab Töö üle vaatama 10 tööpäeva jooksul pärast Töö ning üleandmis- ja vastuvõtmisakti saamist. 2.2. Muuta alapunkti 3.5 teksti ja asendada alljärgnevaga: Juhul, kui Töö vastuvõtmisel on Tellijal pretensioone Töö kvaliteedi ja/või Lepingule vastavuse osas, ei allkirjasta Tellija kontaktisik üleandmis- ja vastuvõtmisakti ning edastab Töövõtjale kirjalikult Töös ilmnenud vead ning puudused. Töövõtja kohustub vead ning puudused likvideerima 5 kalendripäeva jooksul alates Tellija poolt kirjaliku teate saamisest ja esitama parandatud Töö Tellijale (täiendav tähtaeg vastavalt võlaõigusseaduse § 114). 2.3. Muuta alapunkti 6.3 teksti ja asendada alljärgnevaga: Tellija tasub Töövõtjale Lepingu tingimuste kohaselt teostatud kiirustabloode, ülekäiguraja hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega liiklusmärkide hoolduste teostamise eest kolm korda kalendriaastas vastavalt Lepingus ja Lisa 1 Tehnilises kirjelduses sätestatud tingimustele, võttes aluseks Lisa 2 Hinnapakkumuses olevad ühikhinnad. 2.4. Lisada uus alljärgneva sõnastusega alapunkt peale alapunkti 6.3: Tellija tasub Töövõtjale Lepingu tingimuste kohaselt teostatud kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise koos elektriühenduse rajamisega, kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise ilma elektriühenduse rajamiseta kaabelliinist, kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise koos postiga ja kiirustabloode ümberseadistamise või sisse/välja lülitamise eest igakordselt peale vastava töö teostamist vastavalt Lepingus ja Lisa 1 Tehnilises kirjelduses sätestatud tingimustele, võttes aluseks Lisa 2 Hinnapakkumuses olevad ühikhinnad. 2 2.5. Seoses uue alapunkti lisamisega muuta peale alapunkti 6.4 olevate alapunktide numeratsiooni. 3. Muuta HD III Tehnilist kirjeldust alljärgnevalt: 3.1. Muuta alapunktide 1.5 ja 1.6 teksti ning lisada uued alapunktid 1.7; 1.8 ja 1.9 alljärgneva tekstiga: 1.5 Ülekäiguraja hoiatuslampide asukoht koos piltidega on toodud käesoleva tehnilise kirjelduse punktis 11. Ülekäiguraja hoiatuslampide komponentide loetelu on kirjeldatud tehnilise kirjelduse lisas nr 1. 1.6 Märgutuledega märkide asukohad koos piltidega on toodud käesoleva tehnilise kirjelduse punktis 12. Märgutuledega liiklusmärkide komponentide dokumentatsioon ning kasutusjuhend on kirjeldatud tehnilise kirjelduse lisades vastavalt nr 2 ja nr 3. 1.7 Viasis kiirustabloode kasutusjuhend ning kirjeldus on kirjeldatud tehnilise kirjelduse lisades vastavalt nr. 4 ja nr. 5. 1.8 Evolis kiirustabloo kirjeldus on kirjeldatud tehnilise kirjelduse lisas nr 6. 1.9 Bremicker kiirustabloode kasutusjuhend on kirjeldatud tehnilise kirjelduse lisas nr 7. 3.2. Muuta punkti 3.7 teksti ja asendada alljärgnevaga: Seadme tootja poolsete varuosade ja päikesepaneeli (juhul kui neid on vaja vahetada) maksumus jääb Maanteeameti kanda. Töövõtja kanda jäävad kiirustabloo akude, mitte tootja poolsete väiksemate varuosade, kiirustabloo rikkekontrolli, varuosade vahetustööde, kiirustabloo transpordi ja kõik muud kulud, mis on vajalikud kiirustabloo töö taastamiseks. Maanteeametil on õigus loobuda kiirustabloo taastamisest ning see maha kanda, kui taastamine ei ole otstarbekas. 3.3. Muuta alapunkt 8.8. tekst ja asendada alljärgnevaga: Maanteeameti kanda jäävad hoiatuslampide järgmiste komponentide maksumused: Termosensor Trafione 195, Led moodulid: komplekt 1 märk, 24V 1W; sagedusmuundur ning päikesepaneel 24V. Maanteeameti kanda jäävad märgutuledega liiklusmärkide järgmiste komponentide maksumused: 2. klassi kilega kaetud ja LED märgutuledega varustatud liiklusmärk ning päikesepaneel. Töövõtja kanda jäävad ülejäänud hoiatuslampide ning märgutuledega liiklusmärkide komponentide, sealhulgas akude, maksumused ning hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega liiklusmärkide rikkekontrolli, varuosade vahetustööde, hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega liiklusmärkide transpordi ja kõik muud kulud, mis on vajalikud hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega liiklusmärkide töö taastamiseks. Maanteeametil on õigus loobuda hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega liiklusmärkide taastamisest ning need maha kanda, kui taastamine ei ole otstarbekas. 3.4. Kustutada alapunktid 9.3 kuni 9.5 ning asendada uute alapunktidega 9.3 ja 9.4 koos alljärgneva tekstiga: Kalendriaasta jooksul tehtud kiirustabloode, ülekäiguraja hoiatuslampide ja märgutuledega liiklusmärkide hooldustööde eest tasumine toimub kolmes osas peale märtsis, augustis ja oktoobris teostatud korraliste hooldustööde teostamist ja töö vastuvõtmist Tellija poolt. Hooldustööde eest tasutakse Lepingu lisa 2 Hinnapakkumuses toodud ühikuhinna alusel vastavalt teostatud tööde mahule. Kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise koos elektriühenduse rajamisega, kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise ilma elektriühenduse rajamiseta kaabelliinist, kiirustabloode ümbertõstmise koos postiga ja kiirustabloode ümberseadistamise või sisse/välja 3 lülitamise eest tasutakse igakordselt peale vastava töö teostamist ja vastuvõtmist Tellija poolt, Lepingu lisa 2 Hinnapakkumuses toodud ühikuhinna alusel vastavalt teostatud tööde mahule. 3.5. Lisada tehnilise kirjelduse lõppu tehnilise kirjelduse lisade nimekiri alljärgnevas sõnatuses: Lisa 1 – Hoiatuslampide komponentide loetelu Lisa 2 – Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi tootja dokumentatsioon Lisa 3 – Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi kasutusjuhend Lisa 4 – Viasis kiirustabloo kasutusjuhend Lisa 5 – Viasis kiirustabloode kirjeldus Lisa 6 – Evolis kiirustabloo kirjeldus Lisa 7 – Bremicker kiirustabloode kasutusjuhend 3.6. Kustutada HD III Tehnilise kirjelduse lisad 1 kuni 3 ning asendada lisadega 1 kuni 7 alljärgnevalt: Lisa 1 – Hoiatuslampide komponentide loetelu Lisa 2 – Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi tootja dokumentatsioon Lisa 3 – Märgutuledega liiklusmärgi kasutusjuhend Lisa 4 – Viasis kiirustabloo kasutusjuhend Lisa 5 – Viasis kiirustabloode kirjeldus Lisa 6 – Evolis kiirustabloo kirjeldus Lisa 7 – Bremicker kiirustabloode kasutusjuhend (allkirjastatud digitaalselt) Erkki Vaheoja juhataja teehoiu korraldamise osakond
Allikas: Maanteeamet dokumendiregister →
dokumendiregister.eeAsutusedEesti avalike dokumendiregistrite otsing · nimistu.ee andmetel